TLE94713ESXUMA1 - INFINEON TECHNOLOGIES AG

Data Sheet Rev. 1.0

www.infineon.com 1 2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

1 Overview

Features

Key Features

• Very low quiescent current consumption in Stop- and Sleep Mode

• Periodic Cyclic Wake in SBC Normal-, Stop- and Sleep Mode

• Periodic Cyclic Sense in SBC Normal-, Stop- and Sleep Mode

• Low-Drop Buck DC/DC Voltage Regulator 5 V, 500 mA for main supply with integrated spread spectrum

modulation feature for optimum EMC performance

• Low-Drop Linear Voltage Regulator 5 V, 100 mA, protection feature for off-board usage

• High-Speed CAN transceiver supporting FD communication up to 5 Mbit/s and featuring CAN Partial

Networking & CAN FD tolerant mode according to ISO 11898-2:2016 & SAE J2284

• Fully compliant to “Hardware Requirements for LIN, CAN and FlexRay Interfaces in Automotive

Applications” Revision 1.3, 2012-05-04

• Charge pump-output for N-channel MOSFET reverse-polarity protection or load switch feature with

integrated spread spectrum modulation feature for optimum EMC performance

• Universal High-Voltage Wake input for voltage level monitoring and wake-up detection

• General Purpose High-Voltage in- and output (GPIO) configurable as Fail Output, Wake Input, Low-Side

switch or High-Side switch

• High-Voltage Measurement function as alternate pin assignment

• Fail Output for Fail-Safe signalization

• Configurable wake-up sources

• Reset & Interrupt outputs

• Configurable timeout and window watchdog

• Overtemperature and short circuit protection feature

• Dedicated TEST pin for SBC Development Mode entry (watchdog counter stopped)

• Software compatible to other SBC families TLE926x and TLE927x

• Wide input voltage and temperature range

• Optimized for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and low Electromagnetic Emission (EME)

• Optimized for high immunity against Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

• AEC Qualified & Green Product (RoHS compliant)

Data Sheet 2 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Overview

Scalable System Basis Chip (SBC) Family

• Product family for complete scalable application coverage

• Optimized feature set for optimal system design

• Dedicated Data Sheets are available for all product variants

• Complete compatibility (hardware- and software across the family)

• Same PG-TSDSO-24-1 package with exposed pad (EP) for all product variants

• CAN Partial Networking variants (-3ES)

• Product variants for 5 V (TLE94xxyy) and 3.3 V (TLE94xxyyV33) output voltage for main regulator

• Software compatible to other SBC families TLE926x and TLE927x

Potential applications

• In-Cabin Wireless Charger

• Transmission, Transfer Case, Gear shifter and selectors

• Exhaust module and NOx sensor

• Water pump

•Wiper

• HVAC ECU and Control panel

• Light Control Unit (LCU) for front, rear and ambient

• Seat belt pretension

• Steering column and steering lock

Product validation

Qualified for automotive applications. Product validation according to AEC-Q100/101.

Description

The TLE9471-3ES is a monolithically integrated circuit in an exposed pad PG-TSDSO-24-1 (150 mil) power

package. The device is designed for various CAN automotive applications as main supply for the

microcontroller and as interface for a CAN bus network.

To support these applications, the System Basis Chip (SBC) provides the main functions, such as a 5 V low-

dropout voltage regulator (Buck SMPS) for e.g. a microcontroller supply, another 5 V low-dropout voltage

regulator with off-board protection for e.g. sensor supply, a HS-CAN transceiver supporting CAN FD and CAN

Partial Networking (incl. FD tolerant mode) for data transmission, a high-voltage GPIO with embedded

protective functions and a 16-bit Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) to control and monitor the device. Also a

configurable timeout / window watchdog circuit with a reset feature, one dedicated fail output and an

undervoltage reset feature are implemented.

The device offers low-power modes in order to minimize current consumption in applications that are

connected permanently to the battery. A wake-up from the low-power mode is possible via a message on the

CAN buses, via the bi-level sensitive monitoring/wake-up input as well as via Cyclic Wake.

The device is designed to withstand the severe conditions of automotive applications

Type Package Marking

TLE9471-3ES PG-TSDSO-24-1 TLE9471-3ES

Data Sheet 3 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Overview   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Pin Configuration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1 Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8
2 Pin Definitions and Functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8
3 Hints for Unused Pins  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  10
4 Hints for Alternate Pin Functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  10
General Product Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  11
2 Functional Range  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  13
3 Thermal Resistance  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  14
4 Current Consumption  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  15
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1 Block Description of State Machine    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  20
1.1 Device Configuration and SBC Init Mode   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  21
1.1.1 Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  21
1.1.2 SBC Init Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  24
1.2 SBC Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  25
1.3 SBC Stop Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  26
1.4 SBC Sleep Mode   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  27
1.5 SBC Restart Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  28
1.6 SBC Fail-Safe Mode   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  29
1.7 SBC Development Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  30
1.8 Electrical Characteristics for Pin TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  32
2 Wake Features   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  33
2.1 Cyclic Sense  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  33
2.1.1 Configuration and Operation of Cyclic Sense  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  34
2.1.2 Cyclic Sense in Low-Power Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  37
2.2 Cyclic Wake   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  37
2.3 Internal Timer  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  38
3 Charge Pump Output for Reverse Polarity Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  39
3.1 Electrical Characteristics for Charge Pump   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  40
4 High-Voltage Measurement Interface  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  41
4.1 Block Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  41
4.2 Functional Description   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  41
4.3 Electrical Characteristics for Measurement Interface   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  43
5 Spread Spectrum Modulation Frequency Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  44
6 Partial Networking on CAN   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  45
6.1 CAN Partial Networking - Selective Wake Feature   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  45
6.2 SBC Partial Networking Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  46
6.2.1 Activation of SWK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  47
6.2.2 Wake-up Pattern (WUP)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  48
6.2.3 Wake-up Frame (WUF)   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  48
6.2.4 CAN Protocol Error Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  49
6.3 Diagnoses Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
Table of Contents

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 4 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
6.3.1 PWRON/RESET-FLAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
6.3.2 BUSERR-Flag  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
6.3.3 TXD Dominant Time-out flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
6.3.4 WUP Flag   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
6.3.5 WUF Flag (WUF)   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
6.3.6 SYSERR Flag (SYSERR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
6.3.7 Configuration Error  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  51
6.3.8 CAN Bus Timeout-Flag (CANTO)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  51
6.3.9 CAN Bus Silence-Flag (CANSIL)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  51
6.3.10 SYNC-FLAG (SYNC)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  51
6.3.11 SWK_SET FLAG (SWK_SET)   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  51
6.4 SBC Modes for Selective Wake (SWK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  52
6.4.1 SBC Normal Mode with SWK  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  52
6.4.2 SBC Stop Mode with SWK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  53
6.4.3 SBC Sleep Mode with SWK  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  54
6.4.4 SBC Restart Mode with SWK   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  55
6.4.5 SBC Fail-Safe Mode with SWK  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  56
6.5 Wake-up  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  56
6.6 Configuration for SWK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  56
6.7 CAN Flexible Data Rate (CAN FD) Tolerant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  57
6.8 Clock and Data Recovery   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  58
6.8.1 Configuring the Clock Data Recovery for SWK   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  58
6.8.2 Setup of Clock and Data Recovery  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  59
6.9 Electrical Characteristics   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  60
Voltage Regulator 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1 Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  62
2 Functional Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  63
2.1 Pulse With Modulation (PWM) and Spread Spectrum Modulation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  63
2.2 Low-Power Mode Operation   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  63
2.3 PWM to Low-Power Mode Handover  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  63
2.4 External Components Selection  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  64
3 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  65
Voltage Regulator 2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1 Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  67
2 Functional Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  68
2.1 Short to Battery Protection   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  68
3 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  69
High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1 Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
2 Functional Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
2.1 CAN Off Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  74
2.2 CAN Normal Mode   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  74
2.3 CAN Receive Only Mode   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  75
2.4 CAN Wake Capable Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  75
2.5 CAN Bus termination  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  76
2.6 TXD Time-out Feature  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  76

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 5 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
2.7 Bus Dominant Clamping  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  77
2.8 Undervoltage Detection  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  77
3 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  78
High-Voltage Wake and Voltage Monitoring Input  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1 Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  85
2 High-Voltage Wake Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  86
2.1 Functional Description   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  86
2.2 Wake Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  87
2.3 Wake configuration for Cyclic Sense   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  88
2.4 High-Voltage Sensing as Alternate Function   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  88
3 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  89
Interrupt Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1 Block and Functional Description   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  90
2 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  92
Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1 Block and Functional Description   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  93
1.1 Fail-Output Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  94
1.2 General Purpose I/O Function as Alternate Function   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  95
1.3 WK and FO/GPIO HV-Sensing Function as Alternative Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  98
2 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  99
Supervision Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1 Reset Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  101
1.1 Reset Output Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  101
1.2 Soft Reset Description  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  102
2 Watchdog Function  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  103
2.1 Time-Out Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  104
2.2 Window Watchdog  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  104
2.3 Watchdog Setting Check Sum  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  105
2.4 Watchdog during SBC Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  105
2.5 Watchdog Start in SBC Stop Mode due to Bus Wake  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  106
3 VS Power-On Reset   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  107
4 VS Under- and Overvoltage  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  108
4.1 VS Undervoltage  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  108
4.2 VS Overvoltage   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  108
5 VCC1 Over-/ Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  108
5.1 VCC1 Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  108
5.2 VCC1 Overvoltage  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  109
6 VCC1 Short Circuit Diagnostics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  110
7 VCC2 Undervoltage and VCAN Undervoltage   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  110
8 Thermal Protection  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  111
8.1 Individual Thermal Shutdown    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  111
8.2 Temperature Prewarning  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  111
8.3 SBC Thermal Shutdown   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  111
9 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  112
Serial Peripheral Interface  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1 SPI Block Description   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  116

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 6 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
2 Failure Signalization in the SPI Data Output  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  117
3 SPI Programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  118
4 SPI Bit Mapping   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  121
5 SPI Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  124
5.1 General Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  127
5.2 Selective Wake Control Registers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  139
6 SPI Status Information Registers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  151
6.1 General Status Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  152
6.2 Selective Wake Status Registers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  159
6.3 Family and Product Information Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  161
7 Electrical Characteristics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  162
Application Information  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1 Application Diagrams  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  164
2 ESD Tests  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  170
3 Thermal Behavior of Package  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  171
4 Further Application Information   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  172
Package Outlines  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Revision History  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Data Sheet 7 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Block Diagram

2 Block Diagram

Figure 1 TLE9471-3ES Block Diagram

CC1

SPI

Interrupt

Control

SBC

STATE

MACHINE

SDI

SDO

CLK

CSN

VCC1

CAN cell

Watchdog

TXDCAN

RXDCAN

VCAN

CANH

CANL

WK /VSENSE

RESET

GENERATOR

INTN

GND

WAKE

Fail Safe

FO /GPIO

CC2

VCC2

Selective Wake

Logic

BCKS W

Vint .

VCP

Charge

Pump

Alternative Function :

GPIO

RSTN

TEST

Data Sheet 8 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Pin Configuration

3 Pin Configuration

3.1 Pin Assignment

Figure 2 Pin Configuration

3.2 Pin Definitions and Functions

Pin Symbol Function

1VCAN HS-CAN Supply Input; Supply needed for CAN Normal and Receive Only Mode

2TXDCAN Transmit CAN

3RXDCAN Receive CAN

4CLK SPI Clock Input

5SDI SPI Data Input; input for SBC (=MOSI)

6SDO SPI Data Output; output from SBC (=MISO)

7CSN SPI Chip Select Input; active low

8INTN Interrupt Output; used as wake-up flag for microcontroller in SBC Stop or

Normal Mode and for indicating failures. Active low.

During start-up used to set the SBC configuration in case of watchdog trigger

failure. External pull-up (typ. 47 kΩ) sets config 1/3, otherwise config 2/4 is

selected.

CANL

CANH

GND

VCC2

FO/GPIO

WK/VSENSECSN

INTN

RSTN

TEST

GND

VCC1

VCAN

TXDCAN

RXDCAN

CLK

SDI

SDO

VCP

n.c.

BCKSW

TLE9471

Exposed

Die

Pad

Data Sheet 9 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Pin Configuration

Note: Both VS Pins must be connected to same battery potential;

all GND pins as well as the Cooling Tab must be connected to one common GND potential

9RSTN Reset Output; active low, internal pull-up

10 TEST Test Pin; Connect to GND or leave open for normal user mode operation;

Connect to VCC1 at device power-on to activate SBC Development Mode

(see Chapter 5.1.7). Integrated pull-down resistor.

11 GND Ground; DC/DC Power GND

12 VCC1 Sense Voltage Regulator 1; Feedback Input for Buck Converter

13 BCKSW Buck Switched Mode Power Supply Output

14 n.c. not connected; internally not bonded

15 VS Supply Voltage; Supply for VCC1 power stage - both VS pins must be connected

together on same battery potential for proper operation; Connect to battery

voltage via reverse polarity protection diode and filter against EMC

16 VS Supply Voltage; Main supply of device - both VS pins must be connected

together on same battery potential for proper operation; Connect to battery

voltage via reverse polarity protection diode and filter against EMC

17 VCP Charge Pump Output; For driving the gate of external N-channel MOSFETs, e.g.

for reverse polarity protection or Kl.30 load switch. Always place a 1kΩ resistor

in series for protection

18 WK/VSENSE Wake Input;

Sense Input; Alternate function: HV-measurement function input

19 FO/GPIO Fail Output; Open Drain Output, active low;

GPIO; Alternative function: configurable pin as WK, LS-, or HS-witch supplied by

VS (default is FO, see also Chapter 11.1.1)

Sense Output; Alternate function: if HV-measurement function is configured

20 VCC2 Voltage Regulator 2 Output

21 GND Ground; Analog GND

22 GND Ground; CAN GND

23 CANH CAN High Bus Pin

24 CANL CAN Low Bus Pin

Cooling

Tab

GND Cooling Tab - Exposed Die Pad; For cooling purposes only, connect to but do not

use as an electrical ground1)

1) The exposed die pad at the bottom of the package allows better power dissipation of heat from the SBC via the PCB.

The exposed die pad is not connected to any active part of the IC. However, it should be connected to GND for the

best EMC performance.

Pin Symbol Function

Data Sheet 10 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Pin Configuration

3.3 Hints for Unused Pins

In case functions or pins are not used, it must be ensured that the configurations are done properly, e.g.

disabled via SPI. Unused pins should be handled as follows:

• WK/VSENSE: connect to GND and disable WK inputs via SPI

• RSTN / INTN / FO: leave open

• VCC2: leave open and keep disabled

• VCAN: connect to VCC1

• CANH/L, RXDCAN, TXDCAN: leave all pins open

• TEST: Leave open or connect to GND for normal user mode operation or connect to VCC1 to activate SBC

Development Mode;

•n.c.: not connected; internally not bonded; leave open

• If unused pins are routed to an external connector which leaves the ECU, then these pins should have

provision for a jumper (depopulated if unused)

3.4 Hints for Alternate Pin Functions

In case of SPI selectable alternate pin functions, it must be ensured that the correct configurations are also

selected via SPI (in case it is not done automatically). Please consult the respective chapter. In addition,

following topics shall be considered:

• WK/VSENSE: The pin can be either used as high-voltage wake-up and monitoring function or for a voltage

measurement function (via bit setting WK_MEAS = ‘1’). In the second case, the WK pin shall not be used /

assigned for any wake-up detection nor Cyclic Sense functionality, i.e. WK must be disabled in the register

WK_CTRL_1 and the level information must be ignored in the register WK_LVL_STAT.

• FO/GPIO: The pin can also be configured as a GPIO in the GPIO_CTRL register. In this case, the pin shall not

be used for any fail output functionality.

The default configuration after start-up or power on reset (POR) is FO.

Data Sheet 11 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
General Product Characteristics
 
4 General Product Characteristics
4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 1  Absolute Maximum Ratings1)
Tj = -40°C to +150°C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
Voltages
Supply Voltage VS VS, max -0.3 – 28 V – P_4.1.1
Supply Voltage VS VS, max -0.3 – 40 V Load Dump, 
max. 400 ms
P_4.1.2
Voltage Regulator 1  Sense 
Input 
VCC1, max -0.3 – 5.5 V 2) P_4.1.3
Buck Switch Pin BCKSW VBCKSW, max -0.3 – VS
+ 0.3
V – P_4.1.4
Voltage Regulator 2 Output VCC2, max -0.3 – 28 V VCC2 = 40 V for 
Load Dump, 
max. 400 ms;
P_4.1.5
Charge Pump Output VCP, max -0.3 – VS
+ 16 
VP_4.1.6
Wake Input WK/VSENSE VWK, max -0.3 – 40 V – P_4.1.7
Fail Output FO/GPIO VFO_TEST, max -0.3 – VS
+ 0.3
V – P_4.1.8
CANH, CANL VBUS, max -27 – 40 V – P_4.1.9
Logic Input Pins (CSN, CLK, 
SDI, TXDCAN, TEST)
VI, max -0.3 – VCC1
+ 0.3
V – P_4.1.10
Logic Output Pins (SDO, 
RSTN, INTN, RXDCAN)
VO, max -0.3 – VCC1
+ 0.3
V – P_4.1.11
VCAN Input Voltage VVCAN, max -0.3 – 5.5 V – P_4.1.12
Maximum Differential CAN 
Bus Voltage
VCAN_Diff, max -5 – 10 V – P_4.1.20
Temperatures
Junction Temperature Tj-40 – 150 °C – P_4.1.13
Storage Temperature Tstg -55 – 150 °C – P_4.1.14
ESD Susceptibility
ESD Resistivity VESD,11 -2 – 2 kV HBM3) P_4.1.15
ESD Resistivity to GND, 
CANH, CANL
VESD,12 -8 – 8 kV HBM4)3) P_4.1.16

Data Sheet 12 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

General Product Characteristics

Notes

1. Stresses above the ones listed here may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to absolute

maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.

2. Integrated protection functions are designed to prevent IC destruction under fault conditions described in the

data sheet. Fault conditions are considered as “outside” normal operating range. Protection functions are

not designed for continuous repetitive operation.

ESD Resistivity to GND VESD,21 -500 – 500 V CDM5) P_4.1.17

ESD Resistivity Pin 1,

12,13,24 (corner pins) to

GND

VESD,22 -750 – 750 V CDM5) P_4.1.18

1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.

2) The VCC1 and digital I/O maximum rating can be 6.0 V for a limited time (up to 100h).

3) ESD susceptibility, HBM according to ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001 (1.5 kΩ, 100 pF)

4) Please see chapter “Application Information” For ESD “GUN” resistivity (according to IEC61000-4-2 “gun test” (150 pF,

330 Ω)).

5) ESD susceptibility, Charged Device Model “CDM” EIA/JESD22-C101 or ESDA STM5.3.1

Table 1 Absolute Maximum Ratings1) (cont’d)

Tj = -40°C to +150°C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin

(unless otherwise specified)

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

Data Sheet 13 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
General Product Characteristics
 
4.2 Functional Range
Note: Within the functional range the IC operates as described in the circuit description. The electrical 
characteristics are specified within the conditions given in the related electrical characteristics 
table.
Device Behavior Outside of Specified Functional Range:
• 28V < VS,func < 40V: Device is still functional (including the state machine); the specified electrical 
characteristics might not be ensured anymore. The regulators VCC1/2 are working properly, however, a 
thermal shutdown might occur due to high power dissipation. The specified SPI communication speed is 
ensured; the absolute maximum ratings are not violated, however the device is not intended for 
continuous operation of VS >28V. The device operation at high junction temperatures for long periods 
might reduce the operating life time;
•VCAN < 4.75V: The undervoltage bit VCAN_UV is set in the SPI register BUS_STAT and the transmitter is 
disabled as long as the UV condition is present;
• 5.25V <  VCAN < 6.0V: CAN transceiver is still functional. However, the communication might fail due to out-
of-spec operation; 
•VPOR,f < VS < 5.5V: Device is still functional; the specified electrical characteristics might not be ensured 
anymore:
– The voltage regulators will enter the linear (RDS_On) operation mode ,
– A VCC1_UV reset could be triggered depending on the Vrtx settings,
– GPIO behavior depends on the respective configuration: 
- HS/LS switches remain switched On as long as the control voltage is sufficient. 
- An unwanted overcurrent shutdown may occur. 
- OC shutdown bit set and the respective HS/LS switch will turn Off; 
– FO output remains On if it was enabled before VS > 5.5V,
– The specified SPI communication speed is ensured.
Table 2 Functional Range1)
1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
Supply Voltage VS,func VPOR –28V
2) VPOR see section 
Chapter 12.9
2) Including Power-On Reset, Over- and Undervoltage Protection
P_4.2.1
CAN Supply Voltage VCAN,func 4.75 – 5.25 V – P_4.2.2
SPI Frequency fSPI – – 4 MHz see Chapter 13.7 
for fSPI,max
P_4.2.3
Junction Temperature Tj-40 – 150 °C – P_4.2.4

Data Sheet 14 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

General Product Characteristics

4.3 Thermal Resistance

Table 3 Thermal Resistance1)

1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

Junction to Soldering Point Rth(JSP) –14–K/WExposed PadP_4.3.1

Junction to Ambient Rth(JA) –35–K/W

2) Specified Rth(JA) value is according to Jedec JESD51-2,-5,-7 at natural convection on FR4 2s2p board for a power

dissipation of 1.5W; the product (chip+package) was simulated on a 76.2x114.3x1.5mm3 with 2 inner copper layers

(2 x 70µm Cu, 2 x 35µm C); where applicable a thermal via array under the exposed pad contacted the first inner

copper layer and 300mm2 cooling areas on the top layer and bottom layers (70µm).

P_4.3.2

Data Sheet 15 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
General Product Characteristics
 
4.4 Current Consumption
Table 4 Current Consumption
Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5 V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
SBC Normal Mode
Normal Mode current 
consumption
INormal –3.56.5mAVS = 5.5 V to 28 V;
Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 
VCC2, CAN = Off 
P_4.4.1
SBC Stop Mode
Stop Mode current 
consumption
IStop_1,25 –4455µA
1) VCC2 & CAN2) = Off, 
Cyclic Wake/Sense & 
Watchdog = Off; 
no load on VCC1;
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’
P_4.4.2
Stop Mode current 
consumption
IStop_1,85 –5072µA
1)3) Tj = 85°C; 
VCC2 & CAN2) = Off; 
Cyclic Wake/Sense & 
Watchdog = Off; 
no load on VCC1;
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’
P_4.4.3
Stop Mode current 
consumption
(high active peak threshold)
IStop_2,25 –6572µA
1) VCC2 & CAN2) = Off;  
Cyclic Wake/Sense & 
Watchdog = Off; 
no load on VCC1;
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’
P_4.4.4
Stop Mode current 
consumption
(high active peak threshold)
IStop_2,85 –7092µA
1)3) Tj = 85°C; 
VCC2 & CAN2)= Off;
Cyclic Wake/Sense & 
Watchdog = Off; 
no load on VCC1;
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’
P_4.4.5
SBC Sleep Mode
Sleep Mode current 
consumption
ISleep,25 – 15 25 µA VCC2 & CAN2)= Off; 
Cyclic Wake/Sense = 
Off
P_4.4.6
Sleep Mode current 
consumption
ISleep,85 –2535µA
3) Tj = 85°C; 
VCC2 & CAN2) = Off; 
Cyclic Wake/Sense = 
Off
P_4.4.7

Data Sheet 16 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
General Product Characteristics
 
Feature Incremental Current Consumption
Current consumption for 
CAN module, recessive state
ICAN,rec –23mA
3)SBC Normal/Stop 
Mode; CAN Normal 
Mode; VCC2 
connected to VCAN; 
VTXDCAN = VCC2; no 
RL on CAN
P_4.4.8
Current consumption for 
CAN module, dominant 
state
ICAN,dom –35mA
3)SBC Normal/Stop 
Mode; CAN Normal 
Mode; VCC1 
connected to VCAN; 
VTXDCAN = GND; 
no RL on CAN
P_4.4.9
Current consumption for 
CAN module, Receive Only 
Mode
ICAN,RcvOnly –0.91.2mA
3)4)SBC Normal/Stop 
Mode; CAN Receive 
Only Mode; VCC1 
connected to VCAN; 
VTXDCAN = VCC1; no 
RL on CAN
P_4.4.10
Current consumption during 
CAN Partial Networking 
frame detect mode
(RX_WK_ SEL = ‘0’)
ICAN,SWK,25 – 360 470 µA 3)Tj = 25°C; 
SBC Stop Mode; 
WK, VCC2 = Off; 
CAN SWK Wake 
Capable, SWK 
Receiver enabled, 
WUF detect; 
no RL on CAN; 
P_4.4.11
Current consumption during 
CAN Partial Networking 
frame detect mode
(RX_WK_ SEL = ‘0’)
ICAN,SWK,85 – 390 500 µA 3)Tj = 85°C; 
SBC Stop Mode; 
WK, VCC2 = Off; 
CAN SWK Wake 
Capable, SWK 
Receiver enabled, 
WUF detect; 
no RL on CAN; 
P_4.4.12
Current consumption for 
WK, GPIO wake capability 
(all wake inputs)
IWake,WK,25 –0.22µA
5)6)7) SBC Sleep Mode; 
WK wake capable; 
no activity on WK pin;
CAN = Off; VCC2 = Off
P_4.4.13
Table 4 Current Consumption (cont’d)
Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5 V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.

Data Sheet 17 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
General Product Characteristics
 
Current consumption for 
WK, GPIO wake capability
(all wake inputs)
IWake,WK,85 –0.53µA
3)5)6)7)SBC Sleep Mode; 
Tj = 85°C; 
WK wake capable;
no activity on WK pin; 
CAN = Off; VCC2 = Off
P_4.4.14
Current consumption for 
CAN wake capability
(tsilence expired)
IWake,CAN,25 –4.56µA
2)5)SBC Sleep Mode; 
CAN Wake Capable; 
WK = Off; VCC2 = Off; 
P_4.4.15
Current consumption for 
CAN wake capability
(tsilence expired)
IWake,CAN,85 –5.57µA
2)3)5)SBC Sleep Mode; 
Tj = 85°C; 
CAN Wake Capable; 
WK = Off; VCC2 = Off; 
P_4.4.16
VCC2 Normal Mode current 
consumption
INormal,VCC2 –2.53.5mAVS = 5.5 V to 28 V;
Tj = -40 °C to +150 °C; 
VCC2 = On (no load)
P_4.4.17
Current consumption for 
VCC2 in SBC Sleep Mode
ISleep,VCC2,25 –2535µA
1)5)SBC Sleep Mode; 
VCC2 = On (no load);
CAN, WK = Off
P_4.4.18
Current consumption for 
VCC2 in SBC Sleep Mode
ISleep,VCC2,85 –3040µA
1)3)5)SBC Sleep Mode; 
Tj = 85°C; VCC2 = On 
(no load); 
CAN, WK = Off
P_4.4.19
Current consumption for 
GPIO if configured as low-
side / high-side in SBC Stop 
Mode
IStop,GPIO,25 – 400 550 µA 3)5)SBC Stop Mode; 
GPIO configured as HS 
or LS with 100% duty 
cycle (no load);
CAN, WK = Off
P_4.4.20
Current consumption for 
GPIO if configured as low-
side / high-side in SBC Stop 
Mode
IStop,GPIO,85 – 450 600 µA 3)5)SBC Stop Mode; 
Tj = 85°C; 
GPIO configured as HS 
or LS with 100% duty 
cycle (no load);
CAN, WK = Off
P_4.4.21
Current consumption for 
Cyclic Sense function
IStop,CS25 –2026µA
5)8)9)SBC Stop Mode; 
WD = Off; 
P_4.4.22
Current consumption for 
Cyclic Sense function
IStop,CS85 –2435µA
3)5)8)9)SBC Stop Mode; 
Tj = 85°C; 
WD = Off;
P_4.4.23
Table 4 Current Consumption (cont’d)
Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5 V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.

Data Sheet 18 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

General Product Characteristics

Notes

1. There is no additional current consumption in SBC Normal Mode due to PWM generators or Timers.

2. To ensure the device functionality down to Vpor,f the quiescent current will increase gradually by ~35 uA for VS

< 9 V in SBC Stop Mode and Sleep Mode..

Current consumption for

watchdog active in Stop

Mode

IStop,WD25 –2026µA

3)SBC Stop Mode;

Watchdog running;

P_4.4.24

Current consumption for

watchdog active in Stop

Mode

IStop,WD85 –2435µA

3)SBC Stop Mode;

Tj = 85°C;

Watchdog running;

P_4.4.25

1) If the load current on VCC1 exceeds the configured VCC1 active peak threshold IVCC1,Ipeak1,r or IVCC1,Ipeak2,r, the current

consumption will increase by typ. 2.9mA to ensure optimum dynamic load behavior. Same applies to VCC2. See also

Chapter 6, Chapter 7.

2) CAN not configured in selective wake mode.

3) Not subject to production test, specified by design.

4) Current consumption adder also applies for WUF detection (frame detect mode) when CAN Partial Networking is

activated.

5) Current consumption adders of the features defined for SBC Stop Mode also apply for SBC Sleep Mode and vice versa.

The wake input signals are stable (i.e. not toggling), Cyclic Wake/Sense & watchdog are Off (unless otherwise

specified).

6) No pull-up or pull-down configuration selected.

7) The specified WK current consumption adder for wake capability applies regardless of how many WK inputs are

activated, i.e GPIO configured as wake input.

8) GPIO configured as HS used for Cyclic Sense, Timer with 20ms period, 0.1ms on-time, no load on GPIO.

In general the current consumption adder for Cyclic Sense in SBC Stop Mode can be calculated with below equation

(no load on FO/GPIO):

IStop,CS_typ = 18µA + (IStop,GPIO,25 × ton/TPer)

where 18uA is the base current consumption of the digital Cyclic Sense / wake-up functionality;

9) Also applies to Cyclic Wake but without the contribution of the HS biasing

Table 4 Current Consumption (cont’d)

Current consumption values are specified at Tj = 25°C, VS = 13.5 V, all outputs open (unless otherwise specified)

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 19 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5 System Features

This chapter describes the system features and behavior of the TLE9471-3ES:

• State machine

• Device configuration

•SBC mode control

• State of supplies and peripherals

• System functions such as Cyclic Sense or Cyclic Wake

• Charge pump output for reverse polarity protection and Kl. 30 load switching

• High-voltage measurement interface

The System Basis Chip (SBC) offers six operating modes:

• SBC Init Mode: Power-up of the device (initial and after a soft reset),

• SBC Normal Mode: The main operating mode of the device,

• SBC Stop Mode: The first-level power saving mode (the main voltage regulator VCC1 remains enabled),

• SBC Sleep Mode: The second-level power saving mode (VCC1 is disabled),

•SBC Restart Mode: An intermediate mode after a wake-up event from SBC Sleep or Fail-Safe Mode or after

a failure (e.g. WD failure, VCC1 under voltage reset) to bring the microcontroller into a defined state via a

reset. Once the failure condition is not present anymore the device will automatically change to SBC

Normal Mode after a delay time (tRD1 or tRD2).

• SBC Fail-Safe Mode: A safe-state mode after critical failures (e.g. WD failure, VCC1 under voltage reset) to

bring the system into a safe state and to ensure a proper restart of the system later on. VCC1 is disabled. It

is a permanent state until either a wake-up event (via CAN, WK/VSENSE or GPIO configured as wake-up)

occurs or the over temperature condition is not present anymore.

A special mode, called SBC Development Mode, is available during software development or debugging of the

system. All above mentioned operating modes can be accessed in this mode. However, the watchdog counter

is stopped and does not need to be triggered. In addition, CAN is set to normal mode and VCC2 is On. This

mode can be accessed by connecting the TEST pin to VCC1 during SBC Init Mode.

The device can be configured via hardware to determine the device behavior after a watchdog trigger failure.

See Chapter 5.1.1 for further information.

The System Basis Chip is controlled via a 16-bit SPI interface. A detailed description can be found in

Chapter 13. The device configuration as well as the diagnosis is handled via the SPI. The SPI mapping of the

TLE9471-3ES is compatible to other devices of the TLE926x and TLE927x families.

The device offers various supervision features to support functional safety requirements. Please see

Chapter 12 for more information.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 20 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.1 Block Description of State Machine

The different SBC operating modes are selected via SPI by setting the respective SBC MODE bits in the register

M_S_CTRL. The SBC MODE bits are cleared when going through SBC Restart Mode and thus always show the

current SBC mode.

Figure 3 State Diagram showing the SBC Operating Modes including CAN Partial Networking

SBC Init Mode

(Long open window)

VCC1

VCC2

OFF

FOx

inact.

CAN

(3)

OFF

Wake up event

SPI cmd SPI cmd SPI cmd

Any SPI

command

WD trigger

First battery connection

VCC1

Undervoltage

Automatic

1st Watchdog Failure Config 2,

2nd Watchdog Failure, Config 4

VCC1 Short to GND

SBC Soft Reset

Reset is released

WD starts with long open window

(1) After Fail-Safe Mode entry, the device will stay for at least typ . 1s

in this mode (with RO low) after a TSD2 event and min. typ. 100ms

after other Fail-Safe Events. Only then the device can leave the

mode via a wake-up event. Wake events are stored during this time.

(3) For SBC Development Mode CAN/VCC2 are ON in SBC Init Mode

and stay ON when going from there to SBC Normal Mode

(4) See chapter CAN for detailed behavior in SBC Restart Mode

(5) CAN transceiver can be SWK capable, depending on configuration

(6) See Chapter 5.1.5 and 12.1 for detailed FOx behavior

config.

OFF/fixed

SBC Normal Mode

VCC1

VCC2

config.

FOx

act/inact

CAN

(3)

config.

SBC Sleep Mode

VCC1

OFF

VCC2

fixed

FOx

fixed

CAN

(5)

Wake

capable /off

OFF.

fixed

SBC Stop Mode

VCC1

VCC2

fixed

FOx

fixed

CAN

(5)

fixed

SBC Restart Mode

(RO pin is asserted)

VCC1

ON/

ramping

VCC2

OFF

FOx

(6)

active/

fixed

CAN

(4)

woken /

OFF

fixed

SBC Fail-Safe Mode

(1)

VCC1

OFF

VCC2

OFF

FOx

(6)

active

CAN

Wake

capable

OFF

fixed

Config .: settings can be

changed in this SBC mode ;

Fixed: settings stay as

defined in SBC Normal Mode

TSD2 event,

* The SBC Development

Mode is a super set of state

machine where the WD timer

is stopped , CAN & VCC2

behavior differs in SBC Init

Mode. Otherwise , there are

no differences in behavior .

Cyc. W/S

OFF

SPI

enabled

Cyc. W/S

config.

SPI

config.

Cyc. W/S

fixed

SPI

enabled

Cyc. W/S

fixed

SPI

disabled

Cyc. W/S

OFF

SPI

disabled

Cyc. W/S

OFF

SPI

disabled

CAN, WK or GPIO WK wake -up event

Release of over temperature TSD2

after t

TSD 2

VCC1 over voltage

Config 2/4 (if VCC_OV_RST set)

VCC1 over voltage

Config 1/3 (if VCC_OV_RST set)

Watchdog Failure:

Config 1/3 & 1st WD failure

in Config4

Bit Locking Mechanism:

certain control bits, e.g. the

Charge Pump (CP) can be

locked and will not change

their configuration after a Soft

Reset command (stay fixed)

SBC Sleep Mode entry

without any wake

source enabled

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 21 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.1.1 Device Configuration and SBC Init Mode
The device starts up in SBC Init Mode after crossing the power-on reset threshold VPOR,r (see also Chapter 12.3)
and the watchdog starts with a long open window (tLW) after RSTN is released (High level).
During this power-on phase the following configurations are stored in the device:
• The device behavior regarding a watchdog trigger failure and a VCC1 over voltage condition is determined 
by the external circuit on the INTN pin (typ. 47 kΩ pull-up resistor to VCC1, see also below) 
• The selection of the normal user mode operation or the SBC Development Mode (watchdog = Off, CAN = 
On, VCC2 = On for debugging purposes) is set depending on the voltage level of the TEST pin (see also 
Chapter 5.1.7).
5.1.1.1 Device Configuration
The configuration selection selects the SBC behavior due to a watchdog trigger failure and VCC1 overvoltage
detection. Depending on the requirements of the application, two different configurations can be chosen: 
- If the VCC1 output shall be switched Off and the device shall go to SBC Fail-Safe Mode in case of a watchdog
failure (1 or 2 fails). To set this configuration (Config 2/4), the INTN pin does not need an external pull-up
resistor. 
- If VCC1 should not be switched Off (Config 1/3), the INTN pin needs to have an external pull-up resistor
connected to VCC1 (see application diagram in Chapter 14). 
Figure 4 shows the timing diagram of the hardware configuration selection. The hardware configuration is
defined during SBC Init Mode. The INTN pin is internally pulled Low with a weak pull-down resistor during the
reset delay time tRD1, i.e. after VCC1 crosses the reset threshold VRT1 and before the RSTN pin goes High. The
INTN pin is monitored during this time (with a continuous filter time of tCFG_F) and the configuration
(depending on the voltage level at INTN) is stored at the rising edge of RSTN. 
Note: If the POR bit is not cleared, then the internal pull-down resistor at INTN is reactivated every time 
RSTN is pulled Low the configuration is updated at the rising edge of RSTN. Therefore it is 
recommended to clear the POR bit right after initialization. In case there is no stable signal at INTN, 
then the last filtered value is taken. If no filtered value is taken then the default value ‘0’ is taken as 
the config select value (= SBC Fail-Safe Mode).
Note: During device power up, the SPI status bits VCC1_ WARN, VCC1_UV and VS_UV are updated only if 
RSTN is released after the reset delay time.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 22 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Figure 4 Hardware Configuration Selection Timing Diagram
There are four different device configurations (Table 5) available defining the watchdog failure and the VCC1
over voltage behavior. The configurations can be selected via the external connection on the INTN pin and the
SPI bit CFG1 in the HW_CTRL_0 register (see also Chapter 13.4):
•CFG0_STATE = ‘1’: Config 1 and Config 3:
– A watchdog trigger failure leads to SBC Restart Mode and depending on CFG1 the Fail Output (FO) is 
activated after the 1st (Config 1) or 2nd (Config 3) watchdog trigger failure;
– A VCC1 over voltage detection leads to SBC Restart Mode if VCC1_OV_RST is set. 
VCC1_ OV is set and the Fail Output is activated;
•CFG0_STATE = ‘0’: Config 2 and Config 4:
– A watchdog trigger failure leads to SBC Fail-Safe Mode and depending on CFG1 the Fail Output (FO) is 
activated after the 1st (Config 2) or 2nd (Config 4) watchdog trigger failure. The first watchdog trigger 
failure in Config 4 leads to SBC Restart Mode;
– A VCC1 over voltage detection leads to SBC Fail-Safe Mode if VCC1_OV_RST is set. 
VCC1_ OV is set and the Fail Output is activated;
The respective device configuration can be identified by reading the SPI bit CFG1 in the HW_CTRL_0 register
and the CFG0_STATE bit in the WK_LVL_STAT register.
Table 5 shows the configurations and the device behavior in case of a watchdog trigger failure:
t
VCC1
t
RO
t
VS
V
POR,r
t
RD1
V
RT1,r
t
CFG_F
Configuration selection monitoring period
Continuous Filtering with  

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 23 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Table 6 shows the configurations and the device behavior in case of a VCC1 over voltage detection when
VCC1_OV_RST is set: 
The respective configuration is stored for all conditions and can only be changed in SBC Init Mode, when RSTN
is ‘Low’ or by powering down the device (VS < VPOR,f) assuming the bit POR is cleared right after the device
power up (see also not on Page 21).
Table 5 Watchdog Trigger Failure Configuration
Config INTN Pin 
(CFG0_STATE)
SPI Bit CFG1 Event FO Activation SBC Mode Entry
1 External pull-up  1 1 x Watchdog Failure after 1st WD Failure SBC Restart Mode
2 No ext. pull-up 1 1 x Watchdog Failure after 1st WD Failure SBC Fail-Safe Mode
3 External pull-up  0 1 & 2 x Watchdog 
Failure
after 2nd WD Failure SBC Restart Mode
4 No ext. pull-up 0 2 x Watchdog Failure after 2nd WD Failure SBC Fail-Safe Mode1)
1) SBC Restart Mode is entered after the 1. watchdog failure. The 2nd watchdog failure leads to SBC Fail-Safe Mode
Table 6  Device Behavior in Case of VCC1 Over Voltage Detection
Config INTN Pin 
(CFG0_STATE)
CFG1 
Bit
VCC1_O
V_RST 
Event VCC1_ 
OV 
FO Activation SBC Mode Entry
1-4 any value x 0 1 x VCC1 OV  1 no FO activation unchanged
1 External pull-
up 
1 1 1 x VCC1 OV  1 after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Restart Mode
2No ext. pull-up1 1 1 x VCC1 OV  1after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Fail-Safe Mode
3 External pull-
up 
0 1 1 x VCC1 OV  1 after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Restart Mode
4No ext. pull-up0 1 1 x VCC1 OV  1after 1st VCC1 OV SBC Fail-Safe Mode

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 24 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.1.1.2 SBC Init Mode
In SBC Init Mode, the device waits for the microcontroller to finish its startup and initialization sequence. 
The SBC starts with a long open watchdog window (see also Chapter 12.2). 
All diagnosis functions which are enabled by default at device power-up are active.
While in SBC Init Mode any valid SPI command (from the SPI protocol, i.e. 16-bit or 32-bit word) sets the device
to SBC Normal Mode, i.e. any register can be written, cleared and read. During the long open window the
watchdog has to be triggered (i.e. thereby the watchdog is automatically configured).
A missing watchdog trigger during the long open window will cause a watchdog failure and the device will
enter SBC Restart Mode.
Wake-up events are ignored during SBC Init Mode. 
A SBC Soft Reset command (MODE = ‘11’) sets the SBC back into SBC Init Mode and the SPI registers are
changed to their respective Soft Reset values. In case one or both lock bits are set (CFG_LOCK_0 or
CFG_LOCK_1) the locked bits keep their previous values and stay unchanged.
Note:  Any SPI command sets the SBC to SBC Normal Mode even if it is an illegal SPI command (see 
Chapter 13.2). 
Note: For a safe start-up, it is recommended to use the first SPI command to trigger and to configure the 
watchdog (see Chapter 12.2).
Note: At power up, the SPI bit VCC1_UV is not set nor is the FO triggered as long as VCC1 is below the VRT,x 
threshold and VS is below the VS,UV threshold. The RSTN pin is kept Low as long as VCC1 is below the 
selected VRT,x threshold and the reset delay time is not expired. After the first threshold crossing 
(VCC1 > Vrt1,r) and the RSTN transition from Low to High, all subsequent undervoltage events lead 
to SBC Restart Mode.
Note: The bit VS_UV is updated only in SBC INIT Mode once RSTN resumes a high level.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 25 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.1.2 SBC Normal Mode
The SBC Normal Mode is the standard operating mode for the SBC. All remaining configurations must be done
in SBC Normal Mode before entering a low-power mode (see also Chapter 5.1.6). A wake-up event on CAN,
WK/VSENSE, FO/GPIO configured as wake input, the Timer will create an interrupt on pin INTN - however, no
change of the SBC mode will occur. The configuration options are listed below:
•VCC1 is always active
• VCC2 can be switched On or Off (default = Off)
• CAN is configurable (it is Off coming from SBC Init Mode; Off or Wake Capable coming from SBC Restart 
Mode, see also Chapter 5.1.5)
• WK/VSENSE pin shows the input level and can be selected to be wake capable (interrupt), the alternative 
measurement function with the voltage output at FO/GPIO can be activated by setting WK_MEAS
• Cyclic Sense can be configured with the HS function of the GPIO (GPIO = ‘011’), WK/VSENSE input and Timer
• Cyclic Wake can be configured using the timer
• Watchdog period is configurable
• The Charge Pump Output can be switched On or Off (default = Off)
• The FO/GPIO output is inactive by default. Coming from SBC Restart Mode and configured as FO it can be 
active (due to a failure event, e.g. watchdog trigger failure, VCC1 short circuit, etc.) or inactive (no failure 
occurred)
• GPIO is configurable and is controlled by PWM; GPIO is Off coming from SBC Restart Mode
Certain SPI control bits with the bit type ‘rwl’ can be protected against unintentional modification by setting
the CFG_LOCK_1 bit in the register HW_CTRL_2. The locking mechanism stays activated until the device is
powered down (VS < VPOR,f). The charge pump and GPIO configuration can also be locked by setting the
CFG_LOCK_0 bit in the register HW_CTRL_1. The lock can be reset in SBC Normal Mode.
In SBC Normal Mode, the FO output can be tested within the system (i.e. to verify whether setting the FO/GPIO
pin to Low creates the intended behavior). The FO output can be enabled and then disabled again by the
microcontroller setting or resetting the FO_ON SPI bit. This feature is only intended for testing purposes.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 26 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.1.3 SBC Stop Mode

The SBC Stop Mode is the first level technique to reduce the overall current consumption by setting the

voltage regulators VCC1, VCC2 into a low-power mode. In this mode VCC1 is still active, supplying the

microcontroller, which can enter a power-down mode. The VCC2 supply can be configured to stay enabled

and CAN to stay in Normal Mode. All settings have to be done before entering SBC Stop Mode. In SBC Stop

Mode all SPI WRITE commands are ignored and the SPI_FAIL bit is set. Exceptions are changing to SBC Normal

Mode, triggering a SBC Soft Reset, refreshing the watchdog as well as reading and clearing the SPI status

registers. A wake-up event on CAN, WK/VSENSE, FO/GPIO (if configured as wake input) and Timer create an

interrupt on pin INTN - however, the SBC mode remains unchanged. The configuration options are listed

below:

•VCC1 is always On

• VCC2 is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• CAN mode is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• WK/VSENSE pin is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• Cyclic Sense is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• Cyclic Wake is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• Watchdog is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• SBC Soft Reset can be triggered

• The Charge Pump state is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• FO output works as configured in SBC Normal Mode unless it is changed by the software (i.e. by clearing

the FAILURE bit and triggering the watchdog properly)

• GPIO is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

If not all wake source signalization flags from WK_STAT_0 and WK_STAT_1 are cleared before entering SBC

Stop Mode, then an interrupt is triggered on the pin INTN.

Note: If outputs are kept enabled during SBC Stop Mode, e.g. HS of GPIO, then the SBC current

consumption increases respectively (see Chapter 4.4).

Note: It is not possible to switch directly from SBC Stop Mode to SBC Sleep Mode. Doing so sets the SPI_FAIL

flag and SBC into Restart Mode is entered.

Note: When WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO are configured for the alternate measurement function (WK_MEAS

= 1) the pins cannot be selected as wake input sources.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 27 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.1.4 SBC Sleep Mode

The SBC Sleep Mode is the second level technique to reduce the overall current consumption to a minimum

needed to react on wake-up events or for the SBC to perform autonomous actions (e.g. Cyclic Sense). In this

mode, VCC1 is Off, not supplying the microcontroller anymore. The VCC2 supply can be configured to stay

enabled. The settings have to be done before entering SBC Sleep Mode. A wake-up event on CAN, WK/VSENSE,

FO/GPIO (if configured as wake input) and the internal Timer brings the device via the SBC Restart Mode

subsequently to SBC Normal Mode again and signals the wake source.

The configuration options are listed below:

•VCC1 is always Off

• VCC2 is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• CAN mode changes automatically from On or Receive Only Mode to Wake Capable mode or can be selected

to be Off

• WK/VSENSE pin is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• Cyclic Sense is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• Cyclic Wake is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode, it can be the only activated wake source

• Watchdog is Off

• The Charge Pump state is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• FO output is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode is maintained

• GPIO is fixed as configured in SBC Normal Mode, it can be the only wake source if configured as WK/VSENSE

• RSTN is pulled low

• SPI communication and all digital I/Os are disabled because VCC1 is Off

• The Sleep Mode entry is signalled in the SPI register DEV_STAT with the bit DEV_STAT

It is not possible to switch Off all wake sources in SBC Sleep Mode. Doing so sets the SPI_FAIL flag and the

device enters SBC Restart Mode.

In order to enter SBC Sleep Mode successfully, all wake source signalization flags from WK_STAT_0 and

WK_STAT_1 need to be cleared. A failure to do so results in an immediate wake-up from SBC Sleep Mode by

going via SBC Restart to Normal Mode.

All settings must be done before entering SBC Sleep Mode.

Note: If outputs are kept enabled during SBC Sleep Mode, e.g. HS of GPIO, then the SBC current

consumption increases respectively (see Chapter 4.4).

Note: The Cyclic Sense function might not work properly anymore in case of a failure event (e.g.

overcurrent, over temperature, reset) because the configured HS of the GPIO and Timer might be

disabled.

Note: When WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO are configured for the alternate measurement function (WK_MEAS

= 1) then the pins cannot be selected as wake input sources.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 28 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.1.5 SBC Restart Mode
There are multiple reasons to enter the SBC Restart Mode. The main purpose of the SBC Restart Mode is to
reset the microcontroller:
• in case of under voltage at VCC1 in SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode and SBC Init Mode after RSTN has been 
released,
• in case of over voltage at VCC1 (if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if CFG0_STATE = ‘1’),
• due to 1st incorrect Watchdog triggering (only if Config1, Config3 or Config 4 is selected, otherwise SBC 
Fail-Safe Mode is immediately entered), 
• In case of a wake event from SBC Sleep or Fail-Safe Mode or a release of over temperature shutdown (TSD2) 
out of SBC Fail-Safe Mode (this transition is used to ramp up VCC1 in a defined way).
From SBC Restart Mode, the device enters automatically to SBC Normal Mode. The SBC MODE bits are cleared.
As shown in Figure 37 the Reset Output (RSTN) is pulled Low when entering Restart Mode and is released
(going High) at the transition to SBC Normal Mode after the reset delay time (tRD1). The watchdog timer starts
with a long open window starting from the moment of the rising edge of RSTN. The watchdog period settings
in the register WD_CTRL are changed to the respective default value ‘100’.
Leaving the SBC Restart Mode does not result in changing / deactivating the Fail Output.
The behavior of the blocks is listed below:
• FO (if configured as FO) is activated in case of a 1st watchdog trigger failure (Config1) or a 2nd watchdog 
failure (Config3) or in case of VCC1 over voltage detection (if VCC1_OV_RST is set)
• VCC1 stays On or is ramping up (coming from SBC Sleep or Fail-Safe Mode)
• VCC2 is disabled if it was activated before
• CAN is “woken” due to a wake-up event or Off depending on the previous SBC and transceiver mode (see 
also Chapter 8). It is Wake Capable when it was in CAN Normal-, Receive Only or Wake Capable mode before 
SBC Restart Mode
• GPIO behavior: switched Off if configured as LS- or HS-switch, see also Chapter 11.1.2
• RSTN is internally pulled Low during SBC Restart Mode
• SPI communication is ignored by the SBC, i.e. it is not interpreted
• The SBC Restart Mode entry is signalled in the SPI register DEV_STAT with the bits DEV_STAT 
Table 7  Reasons for Restart - State of SPI Status Bits (after Return to SBC Normal Mode)
Prev. SBC Mode Event DEV_STAT WD_FAIL VCC1_UV VCC1_OV VCC1_SC
Normal 1x Watchdog Failure 01 01 x x x
Normal 2x Watchdog Failure 01 10 x x x
Normal VCC1 under voltage reset 01 xx 1 x x
Normal VCC1 over voltage reset 01 xx x 1 x
Stop  1x Watchdog Failure 01 01 x x x
Stop  2x Watchdog Failure 01 10 x x x
Stop VCC1 under voltage reset 01 xx 1 x x
Stop  VCC1 over voltage reset 01 xx x 1 x
Sleep Wake-up event 10 xx x x x
Fail-Safe Wake-up event 01 see “Reasons for Fail Safe, Table 8”

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 29 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Note: An over voltage event at VCC1 leads to SBC Restart Mode only if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if 
CFG0_STATE = ‘1’ (Config 1/3). 
Note: The content of the WD_FAIL bits depends on the device configuration, e.g. 1 or 2 watchdog failures.
5.1.6 SBC Fail-Safe Mode
The purpose of this mode is to bring the system in a safe status after a failure condition by turning Off the VCC1
supply and powering Off the microcontroller. After a wake-up event the system restarts again.
The Fail-Safe Mode is automatically entered after following events: 
• SBC thermal shutdown (TSD2) (see also Chapter 12.8.3),
• over voltage on VCC1 if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if CFG0_STATE = ‘0’,
• 1st incorrect watchdog trigger in Config2 (CFG1 = 1) and after a 2nd incorrect watchdog trigger in Config4 
(CFG1 = 0) (see also Chapter 5.1.1),
•  VCC1 is shorted to GND (see also Chapter 12.6),
In this case, the default wake sources CAN, WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO (if configured as wake input - see also
registers BUS_CTRL_0, WK_CTRL_1 and GPIO_CTRL) are activated, the previous wake-up events are cleared
in the register WK_STAT_0 and WK_STAT_1, and both voltage regulators and the GPIO - if configured as HS or
LS - are switched Off. 
The SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered regardless of the FO/GPIO pin configuration. If WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO are
configured for the alternate measurement function (WK_MEAS = 1) then these pins keep their configuration
for the measurement function when SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered, i.e. they are not automatically activated
as wake sources.
The SBC Fail-Safe Mode is maintained until a wake-up event on the default wake sources occurs. To avoid any
fast toggling behavior a filter time of typ. 100ms (tFS,min) is implemented. Wake-up events during this time is
stored and automatically lead to SBC Restart Mode after the filter time. 
In case of a VCC1 over temperature shutdown (TSD2), the SBC Restart Mode is entered automatically after a
filter time of typ. 1s (tTSD2) (without the need of a wake-up event) once the device temperature has fallen below
the TSD2 threshold. Please see Chapter 12.8.3 on how to extend the minimum TSD2 waiting time.
Leaving the SBC Fail-Safe Mode does not result in a deactivation of the Fail Output pins. 
The following functions are controlled by the C Fail-Safe Mode:
• FO output (if configured as FO) is activated (see also Chapter 11)
• VCC1 is switched Off
• VCC2 is switched Off 
• CAN is set to Wake Capable
• GPIO behavior: 
– if configured as HS or LS: it is switched Off
– if configured as wake input: it is set to wake capable in Static Sense mode
• WK/VSENSE pin is set to wake capable in Static Sense mode (only if WK_MEAS = 0)
• Cyclic Sense and Cyclic Wake is disabled
• SPI communication is disabled because VCC1 is Off, RSTN and digital I/O pins are pulled Low
• The Fail-Safe Mode activation is signalled in the SPI register DEV_STAT with the bits FAILURE and 
DEV_STAT 

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 30 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: An over voltage event on VCC1 leads to SBC Fail-Safe Mode only if the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and if

CFG0_STATE = ‘0’ (Config 2/4).

Note: The content of the WD_FAIL bits depends on the device configuration, e.g. 1 or 2 watchdog failures.

5.1.7 SBC Development Mode

The SBC Development Mode is used during the development phase of the module. It is especially useful for

software development.

Compared to the default SBC user mode operation, this mode is a super set of the state machine. The device

starts also in SBC Init Mode and it is possible to use all the SBC Modes and functions with the following

differences:

• Watchdog is stopped and does not need to be triggered. Therefore no reset is triggered due to watchdog

failure

• SBC Fail-Safe and SBC Restart Mode are not activated by a watchdog trigger failure (but the other reasons

to enter these modes are still valid)

• CAN and VCC2 default values in SBC Init Mode and if entering SBC Normal Mode from SBC Init Mode is On

(instead of Off)

The SBC Development Mode is entered automatically, if the TEST pin is set High (i.e. connected to VCC1 with

(5V level) during SBC Init Mode. The voltage level monitoring is started as soon as VS > VPOR,r and VCC1 > VRT1,r.

The SBC Development Mode is set and maintained, if SBC Init Mode is left by sending any SPI command while

TEST is High. The bit SBC_DEV _LVL shows the status of the SBC Development Mode.

The Test pin has an integrated pull-down resistor, RTEST (switched On only during SBC Init Mode), to prevent

an unintentional SBC Development Mode entry (see also Figure 5).

Note: The integrated pull-down resistor is disabled only, if the SBC Development Mode has been entered

successfully, i.e. not when the SBC Init Mode is left with an error (watchdog failure, VCC1

undervoltage reset, etc).

During normal user mode, the integrated pull-down resistor is always activated. In this case the

TEST pin can be left open or connect to GND

Table 8 Reasons for Fail-Safe - State of SPI Status Bits after Return to Normal Mode

Prev. SBC

Mode

Failure Event DEV_

STAT

TSD2 WD_

FAIL

VCC1_

Normal 1 x Watchdog Failure 01 x 01 x x x

Normal 2 x Watchdog Failure 01 x 10 x x x

Normal TSD2 01 1 xx x x x

Normal VCC1 short to GND 01 x xx 1 x 1

Normal VCC1 over voltage 01 x xx x 1 x

Stop 1 x Watchdog Failure 01 x 01 x x x

Stop 2 x Watchdog Failure 01 x 10 x x x

Stop TSD2 01 1 xx x x x

Stop VCC1 short to GND 01 x xx 1 x 1

Stop VCC1 over voltage 01 x xx x 1 x

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 31 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: In case a VCC2 overtemperature event occurs in SBC Init Mode., after SBC Development Mode is

entered, VCC2 is shut down.

Figure 5 Block Diagram of Pin TEST for SBC Development Mode Detection

In case the pin level toggles with a period faster than tTEST during the monitoring period the SBC Development

Mode is not reached .

The SBC remains in this mode for all operating conditions and can only be left by powering down the device

(VS < VPOR,f).

Note: If the SBC enters SBC Fail-Safe Mode due to VCC1 shorted to GND during the SBC Init Mode, the SBC

Development is not entered and can only be activated at the next power-up of the SBC (after the

VCC1 short circuit is removed).

Note: The absolute maximum ratings of the pin TEST must be observed. To increase the robustness of this

pin during debugging or programming a series resistor between TEST and the connector can be

added (see Figure 53).

SBC

Development

Mode

detection logic

TEST

test

TEST

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 32 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.1.8 Electrical Characteristics for Pin TEST

Table 9 Electrical Characteristics1)

VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current

defined flowing into pin

(unless otherwise specified)

1) The external capacitance on the TEST pin must be limited to less than 10nF to ensure proper detection of SBC

Development Mode and SBC User Mode operation.

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

Pull-down Resistance at

pin TEST

RTEST 71013kΩ2)VTEST = VCC1;

SBC Init Mode;

2) Not subject to production test, specified by design.

P_5.1.1

TEST Input Filter Time tTEST 51 64 80 µs 3)

3) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.

P_5.1.2

TEST High Input Voltage

Threshold

VTEST,IH – – 0.7 ×

VCC1

V2) P_5.1.3

TEST Low Input Voltage

Threshold

VITEST,IL 0.3 ×

VCC1

––V

2) P_5.1.4

TEST Hysteresis of Input

Voltage

VTEST,IHY 0.08 ×

VCC1

0.12 ×

VCC1

0.4 ×

VCC1

V2) P_5.1.5

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 33 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.2 Wake Features

The following wake sources are implemented in the device:

• Static Sense: WK/VSENSE input and/or GPIO WK input are permanently active as a wake source, i.e WK_EN

is set and/or FO/GPIO is enabled as wake input (see Chapter 9.2.2 & Chapter 11.1.3)

• Cyclic Sense: WK/VSENSE input only active during On-time of Cyclic Sense period. Internal timer is

activating GPIO HS during On-time for sensing the WK/VSENSE input (see Chapter 5.2.1)

• Cyclic Wake: wake-up is controlled by internal timer, wake inputs are not used for Cyclic Wake (see

Chapter 5.2.2)

• CAN wake: Wake-up via CAN message, i.e. CAN wake-up pattern (WUP, see also Chapter 8) or CAN wake-up

frame (WUF, see also Chapter 5.6)

5.2.1 Cyclic Sense

The Cyclic Sense feature is intended to reduce the quiescent current of the device and the application.

In the Cyclic Sense configuration, the GPIO (configured as high-side driver) is switched On periodically,

controlled by TIMER_CTRL. The high-side switch supplies external circuitries e.g. switches and/or resistor

arrays, which are connected to the wake input WK (see Figure 6). Any edge change of the WK/VSENSE input

signal during the On-time of the Cyclic Sense period causes a wake-up. Depending on the SBC mode, either

the INTN is pulled Low (SBC Normal Mode and Stop Mode) or the SBC is woken enabling the VCC1 (after SBC

Sleep Mode).

Figure 6 Cyclic Sense Working Principle

Switching

Circuitry

Config. as HS

GPIO

FO/GPIO

WK/

VSENSE

SBC

STATE

MACHINE

GPIO_CTRL

TIMER_CTRL

Peri od / On-Time

Signal

to uC

INTN

10k

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 34 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.2.1.1 Configuration and Operation of Cyclic Sense

The correct sequence to configure the Cyclic Sense is shown in Figure 7. All the configurations have to be

performed before the On-time is set in the TIMER_CTRL registers.

Cyclic Sense (=Timer) starts as soon as the respective On-time has been selected independently from the

assignment of the HS and the filter configuration.

The correct configuration sequence is as follows:

• Configuring GPIO as HS with Cyclic Sense functionality

• Enabling WK/VSENSE as wake source

• Selecting the pull-up/down configuration, all configurations are valid for Cyclic Sense, recommended is

the automatic pull-up / down selection

• Configuring the timer period and On-time

Figure 7 Cyclic Sense: Configuration and Sequence

Note: If the sequence is not ensured the Cyclic Sense function might not work properly, e.g. an interrupt

could be missed or an unintentional interrupt could be triggered. However, if Cyclic Sense is the only

wake source and configured properly (e.g. Timer not yet set), then SBC Restart Mode is entered

immediately because no valid wake source was set.

Note: All configurations of period and On-time can be selected. However, recommended On-times for

Cyclic Sense are 0.1ms, 0.3ms and 1ms for quiescent current saving reasons. The SPI_FAIL is set if the

On-time is longer than the period.

Note: A learning cycle is started every time when the timer is started via the On-time and GPIO is

configured as HS with Cyclic Sense = ‘011 (i.e. the Cyclic Sense function is enabled).

Cyclic Sense Configuration

Configure GPIO as HS with cyclic

sense function by setting

GPIO = ‚011' in GPIO_CTRL

Cyclic Sense starts / ends by

setting / clearing On-time

GPIO_CTRL configure as HS

Select Timer Period and desired

On-Time in TIMER_CTRL

Period : 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s,

5s, 10s, 20s, 50s, 100s, 200s, 500 s, 1000s

On-Time: 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 10, 20ms

Select WK pull-up / pull-down

configuration in WK_PUPD_CTRL

No pull-up/-down, pull-down or pull -up

selected, automatic switching

A new timer configuration will become active

immediately , i.e. as soon as CSN goes high

Enable WK as a wake source

WK_CTRL_1

WK_EN in WK_CTRL_1

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 35 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

The first sample of the WK/VSENSE input value (High or Low) is used as the reference for the next cycle. If a

change of the WK/VSENSE input level is detected during the On-time of the second or later cycle then a wake-

up from SBC Sleep Mode or an interrupt during SBC Normal or SBC Stop Mode is triggered.

A filter time of 16µs is implemented to avoid a parasitic wake-up due to transients or EMI disturbances. The

filter time tFWK1 is triggered right at the end of the selected On-time and a wake signal is recognized if:

• there was an input level change (crossing the switching threshold level VWKth) between the current and

previous cycle and

• the input level did not change during the filter time

A wake-up event due to Cyclic Sense also sets the bit WK_WU.

During Cyclic Sense, WK_LVL_STAT is updated only with the sampled voltage levels of the WK/VSENSE pin in

SBC Normal or SBC Stop Mode.

Note: In SBC Stop Mode the respective bits WK_WU and WK_LVL are only updated if the timer On-time is

configured for TIMER_ ON = '001'.

The functionality of the sampling and different scenarios are depicted in Figure 8 to Figure 10. The behavior in

SBC Stop and SBC Sleep Mode is identical except that in SBC Normal and Stop Mode INTN is triggered to signal

a change of WK/VSENSE input level and in SBC Sleep Mode, VCC1 will power-up instead. A wake-up event is

triggered regardless if the bit WK_WU is already set.

Figure 8 Cyclic Sense Timing

Filter time

FWK1

On Time

Periode

GPIO HS

Filter time

FWK1

HS static ON Cyclic Sense

1st sample taken

as reference Wake detection possible

on 2nd sam ple

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 36 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 9 Cyclic Sense Example Timing for SBC Stop Mode, HS starts Low, GND based WK/VSENSE input

Figure 10 Cyclic Sense Example Timing for SBC Sleep Mode, HS starts with On,

GND based WK/VSENSE input

Start of

Cyclic Sense

High

n-1

Low

open

closed

Filt e r tim e

INTN &

WK Bit Set

Learning

Cycle

n-1

= Low

= WK

n-1

no wake event

= WK

n+1

= Low

(but ignored because

change duri ng fi lter tim e )

= WK

n+1

 no wake event

n+2

= High

n+2

≠WK

n+1

wake event

nn+1 n+2

GPIO HS

High

Low

Switch

INTN

High

Low

Sp ike

Start of

Cyclic Sense

High

n-1

Low

open

closed

Filt e r tim e

WK Bit Set

Learning

Cycle

n-1

= Low

= WK

n-1

no wake event

= WK

n+1

= Low (but

ignored because change during

filter time), WK

= WK

n+1

 no w ake event

n+2

= High

n+2

≠WK

n+1

wake event

nn+1 n+2

GPIO HS

High

Low

Switch

High

Low

VCC1

SBC Sleep Mode

Sp ike

Transition to SBC Normal

via Restart Mode

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 37 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

The Cyclic Sense function is disabled at the following conditions (WK/VSENSE is automatically switched to

Static Sense):

• in case SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered: The HS GPIO switch is disabled and the wake pin is changed to static

sensing. An unintended wake-up event could be triggered when the WK/VSENSE input is changed to static

sensing.

• In SBC Normal, Stop, or Sleep Mode in case of an overcurrent or overtemperature (TSD2) event: the HS

GPIO switch is disabled

Note: The internal timer for Cyclic Sense is not cleared automatically in case the HS switch is turned Off due

to above mentioned failures. The timer is only cleared during SBC Restart Mode. This must be

considered to avoid a loss of wake-up events, especially before entering SBC Sleep Mode, i.e. the

software must ensure that at least another wake source is active or re-enable the GPIO HS again.

5.2.1.2 Cyclic Sense in Low-Power Mode

If Cyclic Sense is intended for use in SBC Stop or SBC Sleep Mode, it is necessary to activate Cyclic Sense in SBC

Normal Mode before going to the low-power mode. A wake-up event due to Cyclic Sense sets the bit WK_WU.

In SBC Stop Mode a wake-up event triggers an interrupt, in SBC Sleep Mode the wake-up event moves the

device via SBC Restart Mode to SBC Normal Mode.

Before returning to SBC Sleep Mode, the wake status registers WK_STAT_0 and WK_STAT_1 need to be

cleared. Trying to go to SBC Sleep Mode with uncleared wake flags leads to a direct wake-up from Sleep Mode

by going via Restart Mode to Normal Mode and triggering of RSTN.

The intention of this behavior is to prevent a loss of a wake-up event during the transition.

Note: if an over-current shutdown occurs at the GPIO HS in SBC Sleep Mode, while configured as Cyclic

Sense, and Cyclic Sense is the only wake source, then the SBC leaves SBC Sleep Mode immediately

because there is no other wake source available .

5.2.2 Cyclic Wake

The Cyclic Wake feature is intended to reduce the quiescent current of the device in the application. The

internal timer wakes the load, e.g. the microcontroller, periodically while it is in a low-power mode for the

most of the time.

For the Cyclic Wake feature the timer is configured as an internal wake-up source and periodically triggers an

interrupt on INTN in SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode. During SBC Sleep Mode, the timer periodically wakes

the device (via SBC Restart to SBC Normal Mode).

The correct sequence to configure the Cyclic Wake is shown in Figure 11. The sequence is as follows:

• Enable Timer as a wake-up source in the register WK_CTRL_0,

• Configure the period of the Timer. Also an On-time (any value except ‘000’ or ‘110’ or ‘111’) must be

selected to start the Cyclic Wake function.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 38 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 11 Cyclic Wake: Configuration and Sequence

As in Cyclic Sense, the Cyclic Wake function starts as soon as the On-time is configured. An interrupt is

generated for every start of the On-time except for the very first time when the timer is started.

5.2.3 Internal Timer

The integrated timer can be used to control the below features:

• Cyclic Wake, i.e. to wake-up the microcontroller periodically in SBC Normal, Stop and Sleep Mode

• Cyclic Sense, i.e. to perform cyclic sensing using the wake input WK/VSENSE and the GPIO configured as

HS by mapping the timer accordingly via the GPIO_CTRL register.

Following periods and On-times can be selected via the register TIMER_CTRL respectively:

• Period: 10ms, 20ms, 50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 500ms, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 20s, 50s, 100s, 200s, 500s, 1000s

• On-time: 0.1ms / 0.3ms / 1.0ms / 10ms / 20ms / Off at High or Low

Note: It is also possible to activate Cyclic Sense and Cyclic Wake at the same time with the same timer

setting

Cyclic Wake Configuration

Cyclic Wake starts / ends by

setting / clearing On-time

INTN is pulled low at every rising edge

of On-time except first one

Periods : 10ms, 20ms, 50ms, 100 ms, 200ms 500ms,

1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 20s, 50ms, 100s, 200 s, 500s, 1000 s

On-times: any except ‘000 ' or ‘110 ' ‘111'

A new timer configuration will become active

immediately , i.e. as soon as CSN goes high

Select the Timer as a wake source in

TIMER_WK_EN, WK_CTRL_0

Select Timer Period and any

On-Time in TIMER_CTRL

No interrupt will be generated ,

if the timer is not enabled as a wake source

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 39 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.3 Charge Pump Output for Reverse Polarity Protection

A gate-driver (charge-pump output) is integrated in the TLE9471-3ES to drive external n-channel logic-level

MOSFETs on-board to provide Reverse Polarity Protection in the application or to control a KL. 30 switch (see

Figure 12). The gate voltage is provided at the pin VCP which should be connected as shown in Chapter 14.

The Charge Pump is able to drive up to 3 n-channel MOSFETs with a typ. Ron of 5mΩ.

A spread spectrum modulation feature is implemented for improved EMC behavior. Enabling and configuring

the spread spectrum modulation frequency is achieved via the SPI bits SS_MOD_FR.

Figure 12 Simplified Charge Pump Block

The charge pump output VCP is disabled in SBC Init Mode and can be configured in SBC Normal Mode via the

SPI bit CP_EN. To prevent an unintentional modification of the charge pump state the bit CP_EN can be locked

by setting the bit CFG_LOCK_0. In case the charge pump output must be disabled again then it is necessary to

clear CFG_LOCK_0 before.

The Charge Pump will also stay enabled in the SBC Stop, Sleep, Restart or Fail-Safe Mode if it was not disabled

before entering the respective mode. It does not switch-Off due to overvoltage.

Diagnosis is available by checking the bit CP_EN.

Device protection

against reverse

battery

VCPVS

Dedicated SBC

supply input

Fast switch off

path

Charge Pump

Output

Clamping Circuit

CP-EN

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 40 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.3.1 Electrical Characteristics for Charge Pump
Table 10 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current
defined flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
Charge Pump Output 
Voltage 
VCP_1 VS+ 4.5 – VS+ 6.5 V 1)VS = 5.5V; 
ICP = -40uA;
CL = 3.3nF
1) Applies for the default frequency setting. See also SPI bits 2MHZ_FREQ
P_5.3.1
Charge Pump Output 
Voltage 
VCP_2 VS+ 9.5 – VS+ 14 V 1)2)VS = 10V; 
ICP = -100uA;
CL = 3.3nF
P_5.3.2
Charge Pump Output 
Voltage 
VCP_3 VS+ 10 – VS+ 16 V 1)VS ≥ 13.5V; 
ICP = -200uA; 
CL = 3.3nF
P_5.3.3
Maximum Charge Pump 
Output Current
ICP 200 – 1200 µA 1)2)VCP =  VS + 10V;  
VS ≥ 13.5V; 
CL = 3.3nF
P_5.3.4
Charge Pump Leakage 
Current
ICP,LK –0.52µA
2)VCP = 0V = Off;  
VS = 13.5V
2) Not subject to production test, specified by design.
P_5.3.5
Charge Pump Enabling 
Time
tCP_ON – 95 200 µs 1)2)CSN = High to 
VCP > VS + 10V; 
VS = 13.5V,
CL = 3.3nF
P_5.3.6
Charge Pump Disabling 
Time
tCP_OFF –4565µs
1)2)CSN = High to 
VCP < VS + 2V; 
VS = 13.5V, 
CL = 3.3nF
P_5.3.7

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 41 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.4 High-Voltage Measurement Interface
5.4.1 Block Description
This function provides the possibility to measure a voltage, e.g. the unbuffered battery voltage, with the
protected WK/VSENSE HV-input. The measured voltage is routed out at FO/GPIO in case it is not configured as
FO. 
A simple external voltage divider needs to be placed to provide the appropriate voltage level to the
microcontroller A/D converter input. For power-saving reasons, the function is available only in SBC Normal
Mode and it is disabled in all other SBC modes. 
The benefit of the function is that the signal is measured by a HV-input pin and that there is no current flowing
through the resistor divider during low-power modes.
The functionality is shown in a simplified application diagram in Figure 52.
5.4.2 Functional Description
This measurement function is by default disabled. In this case, WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO have their default
functionality. The switch S_MEAS is open for this configuration (see Figure 52), i.e. there is no connection
between the pins. The measurement function can be enabled via the SPI bit WK_MEAS. If WK_MEAS is set to
‘1’, then the measurement function is enabled and the switch S_MEAS is closed in SBC Normal Mode. S_MEAS
is open in all other SBC modes. In this function the pull-up and pull-down currents of WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO
are disabled and the internal WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO signals are gated. In addition, the settings for
WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO in the registers WK_PUPD_CTRL,  WK_CTRL_1 and GPIO_CTRL are ignored but
changing these setting is not prevented. The registers WK_STAT_0, WK_STAT_1 and WK_LVL_STAT are not
updated with respect to the inputs WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO.  However, if only WK/VSENSE or GPIO WK are set
as wake sources and a SBC Sleep Mode command is set, then the SPI_FAIL flag is set and the SBC changes into
SBC Restart Mode (see Chapter 5.1 also for wake capability of WK/VSENSE and GPIO WK).
If WK_MEAS is set then neither the FO (including the FO test via FO_ON) nor the GPIO functionality or wake
functionality is available. Trying to change the GPIO_CTRL configurations will set the SPI_FAIL. 
If FO/GPIO is configured as FO or any other GPIO configuration, then WK_MEAS cannot be set and SPI_FAIL is
triggered, i.e. FO/GPIO must be first set Off initially.
Table 11  Differences between Normal WK Function and Measurement Function
Affected Settings/Modules for 
WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO 
Inputs
WK_MEAS = 0 WK_MEAS = 1
S_MEAS configuration ‘open’ ‘closed’ in SBC Normal Mode, 
‘open’ in all other SBC Modes but 
configuration is kept
Internal WK/VSENSE & 
FO/GPIO signal processing
Default wake and level signaling 
function, 
WK_STAT_0, WK_STAT_1 and 
WK_LVL_STAT are updated 
accordingly
WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO signals are 
gated internally, WK_STAT_0, 
WK_STAT_1 and WK_LVL_STAT are 
not updated 

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
System Features
 
Data Sheet 42 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Note: There is a diode in series to the switch S_MEAS (not shown in the Figure 52), which influences the 
temperature behavior of the switch. See also Figure 13.
WK_EN, GPIO configured as 
WK
Wake-up via WK/VSENSE and GPIO 
WK possible 
Setting the wake enable bits is 
ignored, i.e. the measurement 
function has priority but the bits can 
be set. 
If only WK_EN and/or GPIO as WK are 
set while trying to go to SBC Sleep 
Mode, then the SPI_FAIL flag is set 
and the SBC changes into SBC Restart 
Mode
SBC Fail-Safe Mode behavior WK/VSENSE is automatically 
activated as wake source; 
see Table 30 for GPIO behavior
Measurement function configuration 
is kept, switch S_MEAS is open
WK_PUPD_CTRL normal configuration is possible no pull-up or pull-down enabled
FO functionality FO functionality is available if 
configured accordingly
FO functionality is not available. 
FO/GPIO must be set to Off before 
setting WK_MEAS. Otherwise the 
SPI_FAIL flag is set.
Table 11  Differences between Normal WK Function and Measurement Function (cont’d)
Affected Settings/Modules for 
WK/VSENSE and FO/GPIO 
Inputs
WK_MEAS = 0 WK_MEAS = 1

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 43 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.4.3 Electrical Characteristics for Measurement Interface

Figure 13 Typical Drop Voltage Characteristics of switch S_MEAS (between WK/VSENSE & FO/GPIO)

Table 12 Electrical Characteristics

VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current

defined flowing into pin

(unless otherwise specified)

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

Input leakage current IWK_MEAS_LK -2 2 µA 0 V < VWK_IN <

VS + 0.3V

Same parameter as

P_10.3.5;

P_5.4.1

Drop Voltage across

S_MEAS switch between

WK/VSENSE and

FO/GPIO when enabled

for voltage

measurement;

VDrop,S_MEAS 40 160 250 mV 1)4V < VWK_IN <

VS + 0.3V;

IWK1 = 200µA;

Tj = 25°C

Refer to Figure 13

1) Not subject to production test; specified by design

P_5.4.2

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

-40 25 150

DROP,S_MEAS

- DROP VOLTAGE OF SWITCH (mV)

Tj - JUNCTION TEMPERATURE (°C)

50 mA

100 mA

250 mA

500 mA

VS = 13.5V

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

System Features

Data Sheet 44 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.5 Spread Spectrum Modulation Frequency Function

The spread spectrum modulation frequency function can be used to reduce electromagnetic emissions for the

buck regulator and for the charge pump.

The spread spectrum function can be enabled and configured by the bits SS_MOD_FR.

The spread spectrum function is derived from the internal 2MHz oscillator (~0.5µs period). The calculations

below are applied to the 2.0MHz setting (2MHZ_FREQ = ‘001’ (for all the other frequencies the values can be

derived).

There is a counter adjusting the oscillator step values up and down. There is a maximum of 32 steps for the

counter available. For the frequency range 2MHZ_FREQ = ‘0xx’ we can choose following modulation

frequencies:

Table 13 Deriving the Modulation Frequency Steps

Setting Periods / Step Width Typ. Resulting Period Typ. Modulation Frequency

SS_MOD_FR = ‘11’ 0.5us / 1 period of 0.5us 16us 1/16us = 62.5 kHz

SS_MOD_FR = ‘10’ 1.0us / 2 periods of 0.5us 32us 1/32us = 31.25 kHz

SS_MOD_FR = ‘01’ 2.0us / 4 periods of 0.5us 64us 1/64us = 15.625 kHz

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 45 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.6 Partial Networking on CAN

5.6.1 CAN Partial Networking - Selective Wake Feature

The CAN Partial Networking (= Selective Wake) feature can be activated for SBC Normal Mode, in SBC Sleep

Mode and in SBC Stop Mode. In SBC Sleep Mode the Partial Networking has to be activated before sending the

SBC to Sleep Mode. For SBC Stop Mode the Partial Networking has to be activated before going to SBC Stop

Mode.

There are 2 detection mechanisms available:

• WUP (Wake-Up Pattern) this is a CAN wake, that reacts on the CAN dominant time, with 2 dominant signals

as defined in ISO WG11898-2:2016.

• WUF (Wake-Up frame) this is the wake-up on a CAN frame that matches the programmed message filter

configured in the SBC via SPI.

The default baudrate is set to 500kBaud. Besides the commonly used baudrates of 125kBaud and 250kBaud,

other baudrates up to 1MBaud can be selected (see Chapter 13 for more details).

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 46 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.6.2 SBC Partial Networking Function

The CAN Partial Networking Modes are shown in this figure.

Figure 14 CAN Selective Wake State Diagram

CAN

Normal Mode

Config Check

CAN

WUP detection 1

CAN

WUF detection

tsilence

CAN Protocoll Error

Counter

not valid

N-1 N+

N>32

max. 4

CAN frames

CAN

WUF

N>0

CAN PN

CAN WK Mode

without PN

CAN

OFF

CAN Wakable Mode

CAN Woken Up

Sleep Mode: SBC goes to Restart Mode,

RxD is low, SPI bits are set

Stop Mode: SBC stays in Stop Mode,

Interrupt is triggered, RxD is low , SPI bits

are set (only in case of CAN WK or SWK

Mode, not in Receive Only with SWK or

CAN Normal Mode with SWK)

valid

Normal Mode: SBC stays in Normal Mode,

Interrupt is triggered, SPI bits are set, RxD

is low (only in case of CAN WK or SWK

Mode, not in Receive Only with SWK or

CAN Normal Mode with SWK)

CAN Receive Only

Mode

CAN Wake

WUP

SPISPI

CAN Wake

WUP

SPI

CAN frame error

detection

Enable/ Disable

CAN

WUP detection 2

Error counter

overvlow

SYSERR

N = 0

rearming

N = 0

Tsilent

CFG_ VAL i s cleared

in Reastart M ode

SYSERR

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 47 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.6.2.1 Activation of SWK

Below figure shows the principal of the SWK activation.

Figure 15 Flow for activation of SWK

CAN_x

Enable CAN

Enabling CAN (not OFF) enables also

the selective wake block. Block gets

synchronous to the CAN bus.

If one CAN Frame is received the bit

SYNC = 1 is set

Set SWK wake data. e.g.

ID, ID_Mask, DATA

Set

CFG_VAL = 1 Bit set to confirm by the microcontroller

that valid data are programmed.

Setting the data can also be done as

first task

SYNC = 1

SBC Normal Mode

SW not enabled

CAN OFF

SYSERR 1

SWK not enabled

In case SWK not enabled:

CAN Normal with SW -> CAN Normal

CAN Rx Only with SW -> CAN Rx Only

CAN Wakable with SW -> CAN Wakable

SBC Sleep Mode SBC Stop Mode

INT generation

stays in SBC Stop Mode

MODE = 10

To ensure that no wake-up event

has taken place in meantime

In case of WUF detection:

CAN_WU = 1; WUF = 1;

CFG_VAL = 0; SWK_SET = 0

Handle wake

event

(incl. CAN

mode toggling)

Clear

SYSERR

Enable a CAN

Mode with SWK

via CAN_x Bits CAN Mode must be toggled before

(re-)enabling wake capable mode

Clear

WK_STAT To avoid invalid configuration

Check SWK_STAT

Check & Clear

WK_STAT

To activate Selective Wake

Selective Wake is now enabled

(INT is generated in case of WUF)

Notes:

- Tsilence handling not shown in drawing

- SYNC will only be set once CAN is „rearmed“ and

at least one CAN frame was sent successfully

SWK_SET = 1, WUP & WUF = 0,

SYNC = 1

Select SBC

low-power mode

via MODE Bits

MODE = 01

Wake-up: VCC1 Power-up

change to SBC Normal Mode

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 48 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.6.2.2 Wake-up Pattern (WUP)

A WUP is signaled on the bus by two consecutive dominant bus levels for at least tWake1, separated by a

recessive bus level.

Figure 16 WUP detection following the definition of ISO 11898-2:2016

5.6.2.3 Wake-up Frame (WUF)

The wake-up frame is defined in ISO 11898-2:2016.

Only CAN frames according ISO11989-1 are considered as potential wake-up frames.

A bus wake-up shall be performed, if selective wake-up function is enabled and a "valid WUF" has been

received. The transceiver may ignore up to four consecutive CAN data frames that start after switching on the

bias.

A received frame is a “valid WUF” in case all of the following conditions are met:

• The ID of the received frame is exactly matching a configured ID in the relevant bit positions. The relevant

bit positions are given by an ID mask. The ID and the ID mask might have either 11 bits or 29 bits.

• The DLC of the received frame is exactly matching the configured DLC.

Ini

Bias off

Bias on

Wait

Bias off

Bus recessive > t

WAKE1

Bus dominant > t

WAKE1

optional:

WAKE2

expired

Bus recessive > t

WAKE1

Bus dominant > t

WAKE1

Bus recessive > t

WAKE1

Bus dominant > t

WAKE1

optional:

WAKE2

expired

Silence

expired AND

Device in low-power mode

Silence

expired AND

device in low-power mode

Entering CAN Normal

or CAN Recive Only

Entering low -power mode ,

when selective wake-up

function is disabled

or not supported

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 49 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

• In case DLC is greater than 0, the data field of the received frame has at least one bit set in a bit position,

where also in the configured data mask in the corresponding bit position the bit is set.

• No error exists according to ISO 11898-1 except errors which are signalled in the ACK field and EOF field.

5.6.2.4 CAN Protocol Error Counter

The counter is incremented, when a bit stuffing, CRC or form error according to ISO11898-1 is detected. If a

frame has been received that is valid up to the end of the CRC field and the counter is not zero, the counter is

decremented.

If the counter has reached a value of 31, the following actions is performed on the next increment of this

counter:

• The selective wake function is disabled,

• The CAN transceiver is woken,

• SYSERR is set and the error counter value = 32 can be read.

By each increment or decrement of the counter the decoder unit waits for at least 6 and at the most 10

recessive bits before considering a dominant bit as new start of a frame.

The error counter is enabled:

• whenever the CAN is in Normal Mode, Receive Only Mode or in WUF detection state.

The error counter is cleared under the following conditions:

• At the transition from WUF detection to WUP detection 1 (after tSILENCE expiration, while SWK is correctly

enabled)

• When WUF detection state is entered (in this way the counter starts from 0 when SWK is enabled)

• At CAN rearming (when exiting the woken state)

• When the CAN Mode bits are selected ‘000’, ‘100’ (CAN Off) or ‘001’ (Wake Capable without SWK function

enabled)

• While CAN_FD_EN = ‘1’ and DIS_ERR_CNT = ‘1’

(the counter is cleared and stays cleared when these two bits are set in the SPI registers)

The Error Counter is frozen:

• after a wake-up being in woken state

The counter value can be read out of the bits ECNT.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 50 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.6.3 Diagnoses Flags
5.6.3.1 PWRON/RESET-FLAG
The power-on reset can be detected and read by the POR bit in the SBC Status register.
The VS power on resets all registers in the SBC to the reset value. SWK is not configured.
5.6.3.2 BUSERR-Flag
Bus Dominant Time-out detection is implemented and signaled by CAN_Fail_x in the register BUS_STAT.
5.6.3.3 TXD Dominant Time-out flag
TXD Dominant timeout is shown in the SPI bit CAN_FAIL_x in the register BUS_STAT.
5.6.3.4 WUP Flag
The WUP bit in the SWK_STAT register shows that a Wake-Up Pattern (WUP) has caused a wake-up of the CAN
transceiver. It can also indicate an internal mode change from WUP detection 1 state to WUF detection after a
valid WUP.
In the following case the bit is set: 
• SWK is activated: due to tSILENCE, the CAN changes into the state WUP detection 1. If a WUP is detected in 
this state, then the WUP bit is set
• SWK is deactivated: the WUP bit is set if a WUP wakes up the CAN. In addition, the CAN_WU bit is set.
• in case WUP is detected during WUP detection 2 state (after a SYSERR) the bits WUP and CAN_WU are set
The WUP bit is cleared automatically by the SBC at the next rearming of the CAN transceiver.
Note: It is possible that WUF and WUP bits are set at the same time, if a WUF causes a wake-up out of SWK, 
by setting the interrupt or by restarting out of SBC Sleep Mode. The reason is because the CAN has 
been in WUP detection 1 state during the time of SWK mode (because of tSILENCE). See also Figure 14.
5.6.3.5 WUF Flag (WUF)
The WUF bit in the SWK_STAT register shows that a wake-up-Up frame (WUF) has caused a wake-up of the CAN
block. In SBC Sleep Mode this wake-up causes a transition to SBC Restart Mode, in SBC Normal Mode and in
SBC Stop Mode it causes an interrupt. Also in case of this wake-up the bit CAN_WU in the register WK_STAT_0
is set. 
The WUF bit is cleared automatically by the SBC at the next rearming of the CAN SWK function.
5.6.3.6 SYSERR Flag (SYSERR)
The bit SYSERR is set in case of a configuration error and in case of an error counter overflow. The bit is only
updated (set to ‘1’) if a CAN mode with SWK is enabled via CAN_x. If INT_ GLOBAL is set, then an interrupt is
triggered on INTN every time SYSERR is set.
When programming selective wake via CAN_x, SYSERR = ‘0’ signals that the SWK function has been enabled.
The bit can be cleared via SPI. The bit is ‘0’ after Power-on Reset of the SBC.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 51 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.6.3.7 Configuration Error
A configuration error sets the SYSERR bit to ‘1’. A configuration check is performed when enabling SWK via the
bits CAN_x. If the check is successful SWK is enabled, the bit SYSERR is set to ‘0’. In SBC Normal Mode it is also
possible to detect a Configuration Error while SWK is enabled. This occurs if the CFG_VAL bit is cleared, e.g. by
changing the SWK registers (from address 010 0001 to address 011 0011). In SBC Sleep Mode this is not
possible as the SWK registers can not be changed. However, in SBC Stop Mode the CFG_VAL bit is also cleared
while trying to modify any SWK register.
Configuration Check: 
in SBC Restart Mode, the CFG_VAL bit is cleared by the SBC. If the SBC Restart Mode was not triggered by a WUF
wake-up from SBC Sleep Mode and the CAN was with SWK enabled, than the SYSERR bit is set. 
The SYSERR bit has to be cleared by the microcontroller.
The SYSERR bit cannot be cleared when CAN_2 is ‘1’ and below conditions occur:
• Data valid bit not set by microcontroller, i.e. CFG_VAL is not set to ‘1’. The CFG_VAL bit is reset after SWK 
wake and needs to be set by the microcontroller before activation SWK again.
•CFG_VAL bit reset by the SBC when data are changed via SPI programming. (Only possible in SBC Normal 
Mode)
Note: The SWK configuration is still valid if only the SWK_CTRL register is modified.
5.6.3.8 CAN Bus Timeout-Flag (CANTO)
In CAN WUF detection and CAN WUP detection 2 state the bit CANTO is set to ‘1’ if the time tSILENCE expires. 
The bit can be cleared by the microcontroller. If the interrupt function for CANTO is enabled then an interrupt
is generated in SBC Stop or SBC Normal Mode when the CANTO is set to ‘1’. The interrupt is enabled by setting
the bit CANTO_ MASK to ‘1’. Each CANTO event triggers an interrupt even if the CANTO bit is not cleared.
There is no wake-up out of SBC Sleep Mode because of CAN time-out. 
5.6.3.9 CAN Bus Silence-Flag (CANSIL)
In CAN WUF detection and CAN WUP detection 2 state the bit CANSIL is set to ‘1’ if the time tSILENCE expires. 
The CANSIL bit is set back to ‘0’ with a WUP. With this bit the microcontroller can monitor if there is activity on
the CAN bus while being in SWK Mode. The bit can be read in SBC Stop and SBC Normal Mode.
5.6.3.10 SYNC-FLAG (SYNC)
The bit SYNC shows that SWK is working and is synchronous to the CAN bus. To get a SYNC bit set it is required
to enable the CAN in CAN Normal or in Receive Only Mode or in WUF detection. It is not required to enable the
CAN SWK Mode.
The bit is set to ‘1’ if a valid CAN frame has been received (no CRC error and no stuffing error). It is set back to
‘0’ if a CAN protocol error is detected. When switching into SWK mode the SYNC bit indicates to the
microcontroller that the frame detection is running and the next CAN frame can be detected as a WUF, CAN
wake-up can now be handled by the SBC. It is possible to enter a SBC low-power mode with SWK even if the
bit is not set to ‘1’, as this is necessary in case of a silent bus.
5.6.3.11 SWK_SET FLAG (SWK_SET)
The SWK_SET bit is set to signalize the following states (see also Figure 14):
• when SWK was correctly enabled in WUF Detection state,
• when SWK was correctly enabled when in WUP Detection 1 state,

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 52 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

• after a SYSERR before a wake event in WUP Detection 2 state,

The bit is cleared under following conditions:

• after a wake-up (ECNT overflow, WUP in WUP detection 2, WUF in WUF detection)

•if CAN_2 is cleared

5.6.4 SBC Modes for Selective Wake (SWK)

The SBC mode is selected via the MODE bits as described in Chapter 5.1.

The mode of the CAN transceiver needs to be selected in SBC Normal Mode. The CAN mode is programed by

the bits CAN_0, CAN_1 and CAN_2. In the low-power modes (SBC Stop, SBC Sleep) the CAN mode can not be

changed via SPI.

The detailed SBC state machine diagram including the CAN selective wake feature is shown in Figure 3.

The application must now distinguish between the normal CAN operation an the selective wake function:

• WK Mode: This is the normal CAN Wake Capable mode without the selective wake function

• SWK Mode: This is the CAN Wake Capable mode with the selective wake function enabled

Figure 17 shows the possible CAN transceiver modes.

Figure 17 CAN SWK State Diagram

5.6.4.1 SBC Normal Mode with SWK

In SBC Normal Mode the CAN Transceiver can be switched into the following CAN Modes

•CAN Off

• CAN WK Mode (without SWK)

•CAN SWK Mode

• CAN Receive Only (No SWK activated)

CAN OFF Mode

CAN WK Mode CAN Normal Mode

(no SWK)

CAN Normal mode

CAN Normal mode with SWK

Config.

Check

CAN

SWK

SPI CAN_x

CAN RX Only Mode

CAN RX Only Mode with SWK

Config.

Check

Config.

Check

CAN

SWK

CAN Wakable Mode

with SWK

CAN Receive-Only

Mode

OKOK

CAN WK

CAN

SWK

CAN WKCAN WK

Not OK Not OK Not OK

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 53 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

• CAN Receive Only Mode with SWK

• CAN Normal Mode (No SWK activated)

• CAN Normal Mode with SWK

In the CAN Normal Mode with SWK the CAN Transceiver works as in SBC Normal Mode, so bus data is received

through RXD, data is transmitted through TXD and sent to the bus. In addition the SWK block is active. It

monitors the data on the CAN bus, updates the error counter and sets the CANSIL flag if there is no

communication on the bus.

It generates a CAN Wake interrupt in case a WUF is detected (RXD is not pulled to low in this configuration).

In CAN Receive Only Mode with SWK, CAN data can be received on RXD and SWK is active, no data can be sent

to the bus.

The bit SYSERR = ‘0’ indicates that the SWK function is enabled, and no frame error counter overflow is

detected.

When reading back CAN_x the programmed mode is shown in SBC Normal Mode. To read the real CAN mode

the bits SYSERR, SWK_SET and CAN have to be evaluated. A change out of SBC Normal Mode can change the

CAN_0 and CAN_1 bits.

5.6.4.2 SBC Stop Mode with SWK

In SBC Stop Mode the CAN Transceiver can be operated with the following CAN Modes

•CAN Off

•CAN WK Mode (no SWK)

•CAN SWK Mode

• CAN Receive Only (no SWK)

•CAN Receive Only with SWK

•CAN Normal Mode (no SWK)

• CAN Normal Mode with SWK

To enable CAN SWK Mode the CAN has to be switched to “CAN Normal Mode with SWK”, “CAN Receive Only

Mode with SWK” or to “CAN SWK Mode” in SBC Normal Mode before sending the SBC to SBC Stop Mode. The

bit SYSERR = ‘0’ indicates that the SWK function is enabled. The table shows the change of CAN Mode when

switching from SBC Normal Mode to SBC Stop Mode.

Note: CAN Receive Only Mode in SBC Stop Mode is implemented to also enable pretended networking

(Partial networking done in the microcontroller).

Table 14 CAN Modes selected via SPI in SBC Normal Mode

CAN Mode CAN_2 CAN_1 CAN_0

CAN Off 0 0 0

CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 0 0 1

CAN Receive Only (no SWK) 0 1 0

CAN Normal Mode (no SWK) 0 1 1

CAN Off 1 0 0

CAN SWK Mode 1 0 1

CAN Receive Only with SWK 1 1 0

CAN Normal Mode with SWK 1 1 1

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 54 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: When SYSERR is set then WUF frames will not be detected, i.e. the selective wake function is not

activated (no SWK), but the MSB of CAN mode is not changed in the register.

5.6.4.3 SBC Sleep Mode with SWK

In SBC Sleep Mode the CAN Transceiver can be switched into the following CAN Modes

•CAN Off

• CAN WK Mode (without SWK)

•CAN SWK Mode

To enable “CAN SWK Mode” the CAN has to be switched to “CAN Normal Mode with SWK”, “CAN Receive Only

Mode with SWK” or to “CAN SWK Mode” in SBC Normal Mode before sending the device to SBC Sleep Mode.

The table shows the change of CAN mode when switching from SBC Normal Mode to Sleep Mode.

A wake-up from Sleep Mode with Selective Wake (Valid WUF) leads to Restart Mode. In Restart Mode the

CFG_VAL bit is cleared by the SBC, the SYSERR bit is not set. In the register CAN_x the programmed CAN SWK

Mode (101) can be read.

To enable the CAN SWK Mode again and to enter SBC Sleep Mode the following sequence can be used:

Program a CAN Mode different from CAN SWK Mode (101, 110, 111), set the CFG_VAL, CLEAR SYSERR bit, set

CAN_x bits to CAN SWK Mode (101), switch SBC to Sleep Mode.

To enable the CAN WK Mode or CAN SWK Mode again after a wake-up on CAN a rearming is required for the

CAN transceiver to be wake capable again. The rearming is done by programming the CAN into a different

mode with the CAN_x bit and back into the CAN WK Mode or CAN SWK Mode. To avoid lock-up when switching

the SBC into Sleep Mode with an already woken CAN transceiver, the SBC does an automatic rearming of the

CAN transceiver when switching into Sleep Mode. So after switching into Sleep Mode the CAN transceiver is

either in CAN SWK Mode or CAN WK Mode depending on CAN_x setting and SYSERR bit (If CAN is switched to

Off Mode it is also Off in Sleep Mode).

Table 15 CAN Modes change when switching from SBC Normal Mode to SBC Stop Mode

Programmed CAN Mode in SBC

Normal Mode

CAN_x

bits

SYSERR

bit

CAN Mode in SBC Stop Mode CAN_x

bits

CAN Off 000 0 CAN Off 000

CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001

CAN Receive Only (no SWK) 010 0 CAN Receive Only (no SWK) 010

CAN Normal Mode (no SWK) 011 0 CAN Normal Mode (no SWK) 011

CAN Off 100 0 CAN Off 100

CAN SWK Mode 101 0 CAN SWK Mode 101

CAN SWK Mode 101 1 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101

CAN Receive Only with SWK 110 0 CAN Receive Only with SWK 110

CAN Receive Only with SWK 110 1 CAN Receive Only (no SWK) 110

CAN Normal Mode with SWK 111 0 CAN Normal Mode with SWK 111

CAN Normal Mode with SWK 111 1 CAN Normal Mode (no SWK) 111

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 55 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.6.4.4 SBC Restart Mode with SWK

If SBC Restart Mode is entered the transceiver can change the CAN mode. After a Restart the following modes

are possible:

•CAN Off

• CAN WK Mode (either still Wake Cable or already woken up)

• CAN SWK Mode (WUF Wake from Sleep)

The various reasons for entering SBC Restart Mode and the respective status flag settings are shown in

Table 18.

Table 16 CAN Modes change when switching to SBC Sleep Mode

Programmed CAN Mode in SBC

Normal Mode

CAN_x

bits

SYSERR

bit

CAN Mode in SBC Sleep Mode CAN_x

bits

CAN Off 000 0 CAN Off 000

CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001

CAN Receive Only (no SWK) 010 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001

CAN Normal Mode (no SWK) 011 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001

CAN Off 100 0 CAN Off 100

CAN SWK Mode 101 0 CAN SWK Mode 101

CAN SWK Mode 101 1 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101

CAN Receive Only with SWK 110 0 CAN SWK Mode 101

CAN Receive Only with SWK 110 1 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101

CAN Normal Mode with SWK 111 0 CAN SWK Mode 101

CAN Normal Mode with SWK 111 1 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101

Table 17 CAN Modes change in case of Restart out of SBC Normal Mode

Programmed CAN Mode in SBC

Normal Mode

CAN_x

bits

SYSERR

bit

CAN Mode in and after SBC

Restart Mode

CAN_x

bits

SYSERR

bit

CAN Off 000 0 CAN Off 000 0

CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001 0

CAN Receive Only (no SWK) 010 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001 0

CAN Normal Mode (no SWK) 011 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 001 0

CAN Off 100 0 CAN Off 100 0

CAN SWK Mode 101 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101 1

CAN SWK Mode 101 1 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101 1

CAN Receive Only with SWK 110 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101 1

CAN Receive Only with SWK 110 1 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101 1

CAN Normal Mode with SWK 111 0 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101 1

CAN Normal Mode with SWK 111 1 CAN WK Mode (no SWK) 101 1

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 56 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.6.4.5 SBC Fail-Safe Mode with SWK
When SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered the CAN transceiver is automatically set into WK Mode (wake capable)
without the selective wake function.
5.6.5 Wake-up
A wake-up via CAN leads to a restart out of SBC Sleep Mode and to an interrupt in SBC Normal Mode and in SBC
Stop Mode. After the wake-up event the bit CAN_WU is set, and the details about the wake-up can be read out
of the bits WUP, WUF, SYSERR, and ECNT. 
5.6.6 Configuration for SWK
The CAN protocol handler settings can be configured in following registers: 
•SWK_BTL0_CTRL defines the number of time quanta in a bit time. This number depends also on the 
internal clock settings performed in the register SWK_CDR_CTRL2;
•SWK_BTL1_CTRL defines the sampling point position;
• The respective receiver during frame detection mode can be selected via the bit RX_WK_ SEL;
• The clock and data recovery (see also Chapter 5.6.8) can be configured in the registers SWK_CDR_CTRL1, 
SWK_CDR_CTRL2, SWK_CDR_LIMIT_HIGH_CTRL and SWK_CDR_LIMIT_LOW_CTRL;
The actual configuration for selective wake is done via the Selective Wake Control Registers SWK_IDx_CTRL,
SWK_MASK_IDx_CTRL, SWK_DLC_CTRL, SWK_DATAx_CTRL.
The oscillator has the option to be trimmed by the microcontroller. To measure the oscillator, the SPI bit
OSC_CAL needs to be set to 1 and a defined pulse needs to be given to the TXDCAN pin by the microcontroller
(e.g. 1µs pulse, CAN needs to be switched Off before). The SBC measures the length of the pulse by counting
Table 18  CAN Modes change in case of Restart out of SBC Sleep Mode
CAN Mode in SBC 
Sleep Mode
CAN Mode in 
and after SBC 
Restart Mode
CAN_
x 
SYS
ERR 
CAN_
WU
WUP WUF ECNT_
x
Reason for Restart
CAN Off CAN Off 000 0 0 0 0 0 Wake-up on other 
wake source
CAN WK Mode  CAN woken up 001 0 1 1 0 0 Wake (WUP) on CAN
CAN WK Mode  CAN WK Mode 001 0 0 0 0 0 Wake-up on other 
wake source
CAN SWK Mode CAN woken up 101 0 1 0/11)
1) In case there is a WUF detection within tSILENCE then the WUP bit is not set. Otherwise it is always set together with the 
WUF bit.
1 x Wake (WUF) on CAN
CAN SWK Mode, CAN woken up 101 1 1 0/12)
2) In some cases the WUP bit might stay cleared even after tSILENCE, e.g. when the error counter expires without detecting 
a wake-up pattern.
0 100000 Wake-up due to error 
counter overflow 
CAN SWK selected,
CAN WK active
CAN woken up. 101 1 1 1 0 0 Wake (WUP) on CAN, 
config check was not 
pass
CAN SWK Mode CAN WK Mode 101 1 0 0/1 0 x Wake-up on other 
wake source

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 57 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
the time with the integrated oscillator. The counter value can be read out of the register
SWK_OSC_CAL_H_STATE and SWK_OSC_CAL_L_STATE. To change the oscillator the trimming function needs
to be enabled by setting the bits TRIM_EN_x = 11 (and OSC_CAL = 1). The oscillator can then be adjusted by
writing into the registers SWK_OSC_TRIM_CTRL and SWK_OPT_CTRL. To finish the trimming, the bits
TRIM_EN_x must be set back to “00”. 
5.6.7 CAN Flexible Data Rate (CAN FD) Tolerant Mode
The CAN FD tolerant mode can be activated by setting the bit CAN_FD_ EN = ‘1’ in the register
SWK_CAN_FD_CTRL. 
With this mode the internal CAN frame decoding is stopped for CAN FD frame formats: 
• The high baudrate part of a CAN FD frame are ignored,
• No Error Handling (Bit Stuffing, CRC checking, Form Errors) is applied to remaining CAN frame fields (Data 
Field, CRC Field, …),
• No wake-up is done on CAN FD frames.
The internal CAN frame decoder is ready for new CAN frame reception when the End of frame (EOF) of a CAN
FD frame is detected.The identification for a CAN FD frame is based on the EDL Bit, which is sent in the Control
Field of a CAN FD frame:
• EDL Bit = 1 identifies the current frame as a CAN FD frame and stops further decoding it.
• EDL Bit = 0 identifies the current frame as a CAN 2.0 frame and processing of the frame is continued
In this way it is possible to send mixed CAN frame formats without affecting the selective wake functionality
by error counter increment and subsequent misleading wake-up. In addition to the CAN_FD_ EN bit also a
filter setting must be provided for the CAN FD tolerant mode. This filter setting defines the minimum dominant
time for a CAN FD dominant bit which is considered as a dominant bit from the CAN FD frame decoder. This
value must be aligned with the selected high baudrate of the data field in the CAN network.
To support programming via CAN during CAN FD mode a dedicated SPI bit DIS_ERR_ CNT is available to avoid
an overflow of the implemented error counter (see also Chapter 5.6.2.4).
The behavior of the error counter depends on the setting of the bits DIS_ERR_ CNT and CAN_FD_ EN and is
show in below table:
The DIS_ERR_ CNT bit is automatically cleared at Tsilence (tSILENCE) expiration.
Table 19  Error Counter Behavior
DIS_ERR_ CNT setting CAN_FD_ EN setting Error Counter Behavior
0 0 Error Counter counts up when a CAN FD frame or an 
incorrect/corrupted CAN frame is received; counts down 
when a CAN frame is received properly 
(as specified in ISO 11898-2:2016)
1 0 Error Counter counts up when a CAN FD frame or an 
incorrect/corrupted CAN frame is received; counts down 
when a CAN frame is received properly 
(as specified in ISO 11898-2:2016)
0 1 Error Counter counts down when correct CAN (incl. CAN FD) 
frame is received
1 1 Error Counter is and stays cleared to avoid an overflow 
during programming via CAN

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 58 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

5.6.8 Clock and Data Recovery

In order to compensate possible deviations on the CAN oscillator frequency caused by assembly and lifetime

effects, the device features an integrated clock and data recovery (CDR).

It is recommended to always enable the CDR feature during SWK operation.

5.6.8.1 Configuring the Clock Data Recovery for SWK

The Clock and Data Recovery can be optionally enabled or disabled with the CDR_EN bit in the

SWK_CDR_CTRL1 SPI register. In case the feature is enabled, the CAN bit stream is measured and the internal

clock used for the CAN frame decoding is updated accordingly.

Before the Clock and Data Recovery can be used it must be configured properly related to the used baud rate

and filtering characteristics (see Chapter 5.6.8.2).

It is strongly recommended not to enable/disable the Clock Recovery during an active CAN Communication.

To ensure this, it is recommended to enable/disable it during CAN Off (BUS_CTRL_0; CAN[2:0] = 000).

Figure 18 Clock and Data Recovery Block Diagram

CDR

80 Mhz Oscilator

(analog)

Aquisition Filter Sampling

Point

Calculation

CAN

Protocoll

Handler

CAN Receiver

(analog)

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 59 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.6.8.2 Setup of Clock and Data Recovery
It is strongly recommended to enable the clock and data recovery feature only when the setup of the clock and
data recovery is finished.
The following sequence should be followed for enabling the clock and data recovery feature:
• Step 1: Switch CAN to Off and CDR_EN to Off
Write SPI Register BUS_CTRL_0 (CAN[2:0] = 000).
• Step 2: Configure CDR Input clock frequency
Write SPI Register SWK_CDR_CTRL2 (SEL_OSC_CLK[1:0]).
• Step 3: Configure Bit timing Logic
Write SPI Register SWK_BTL0_CTRL and adjust SWK_CDR_LIMIT_HIGH_CTRL and 
SWK_CDR_LIMIT_LOW_CTRL according to Table 37.
• Step 4: Enable Clock and Data Recovery
Choose filter settings for Clock and Data recovery. Write SPI Register SWK_CDR_CTRL1 with CDR_EN = 1
Additional hints for the CDR configuration and operation:
• Even if the CDR is disabled, when the baud rate is changed, the settings of SEL_OSC_CLK in the register 
SWK_CDR_CTRL1 and SWK_BTL0_CTRL have to be updated accordingly,
•The SWK_CDR_LIMIT_HIGH_CTRL and SWK_CDR_LIMIT_LOW_CTRL registers have to be also updated 
when the baud rate or clock frequency is changed (the CDR is discarding all the acquisitions and loses all 
acquired information, if the limits are reached - the SWK_BTL0_CTRL value is reloaded as starting point for 
the next acquisitions)
• When updating the CDR registers, it is recommended to disable the CDR and to enable it again only after 
the new settings are updated,
•The SWK_BTL1_CTRL register represents the sampling point position. It is recommended to be used at 
default value: 11 0011 (~80%)

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
 
Data Sheet 60 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
5.6.9 Electrical Characteristics
Table 20 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; 4.75 V < VCAN < 5.25 V; RL = 60Ω; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
 (unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
CAN Partial Network Timing
Timeout for bus inactivity tSILENCE 0.6 – 1.2 s 1)
1) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance
P_5.13.1
Bus Bias reaction time tbias – – 250 µs 1)Load RL = 60 Ω, 
CL = 100 pF, 
CGND = 100 pF
P_5.13.2
Wake-up reaction time 
(WUP or WUF)
tWU_WUP/WUF – – 100 µs 1)2)3) Wake-up 
reaction time 
after a valid WUP 
or WUF;
2) Wake-up is signalized via INTN pin activation in SBC Stop Mode and via VCC1 ramping up with wake from SBC Sleep 
Mode;
3) For WUP: time starts with end of last dominant phase of WUP; for WUF: time starts with end of CRC delimiter of the 
WUF
P_5.13.3
Min. Bit Time tBit_min 1––µs
1)4)
4) The minimum bit time corresponds to a maximum bit rate of 1 Mbit/s. The lower end of the bit rate depends on the 
protocol IC or the permanent dominant detection circuitry preventing a permanently dominant clamped bus.
P_5.13.4
CAN FD Tolerance5)
5) Applies for an arbitration rate of up to 500kbps until the FDF bit is detected and RX_WK_ SEL = 1.
Dominant signals which
are ignored 
(up to 2MBit/s)
tFD_Glitch_4 0–5%
6)7)of arbitration 
bit time; to be 
configured via 
FD_FILTER; 
P_5.13.5
Dominant signals which
are ignored 
(up to 5MBit/s)
tFD_Glitch_10 0–2.5%
6)8)of arbitration 
bit time; to be 
configured via 
FD_FILTER;
P_5.13.6
Signals which are detected 
as a dominant data bit after 
the FDF bit and before EOF 
bit 
(up to 2MBit/s)
tFD_DOM_4 17.5 – – % 6)7)of arbitration 
bit time; to be 
configured via 
FD_FILTER; 
P_5.13.7
Signals which are detected 
as a dominant data bit after 
the FDF bit and before EOF 
bit 
(up to 5MBit/s)
tFD_DOM_10 8.75 – – % 6)8)of arbitration 
bit time; to be 
configured via 
FD_FILTER;
P_5.13.8

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Data Sheet 61 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

6) Not subject to production test; specified by design.

7) A data phase bit rate less or equal to four times of the arbitration bit rate or 2 Mbit/s, whichever is lower.

8) A data phase bit rate less or equal to ten times of the arbitration bit rate or 5 Mbit/s, whichever is lower.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Voltage Regulator 1

Data Sheet 62 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

6 Voltage Regulator 1

6.1 Block Description

The TLE9471-3ES includes a fully integrated SMPS step-down voltage regulator which is the main voltage

regulator. The simplified block diagram is shown in Figure 19.

Figure 19 Simplified DC/DC Block Diagram

Functional features

• 5.0V SMPS (Step-Down) Buck regulator with integrated high-side power switching transistor and

freewheeling diode

• PWM modulation for maximum current capability with 2% output voltage tolerance

• Up to 1% output voltage tolerance for a limited supply voltage and temperature range

• Integrated linear-mode low-power regulator to reduce the current consumption at light loads;

• Automatic transition between PWM modulation and low-power regulator;

• 100% Duty Cycle;

• Programmable switching frequency and configurable spred spectrum feature for EME improvement;

• Internal compensation;

• Integrated soft-start

• Undervoltage prewarning and detection with selectable reset thresholds

• Overvoltage detection

• Output current limit IBCKSW,lim configurable via SPI

• Short circuit detection and switch Off at undervoltage fail threshold (device enters SBC Fail-Safe Mode).

GND

Buck

Converter

VCC1

BCKSW

Feedforward

Soft Start

Ramp

Generator

Bandgap

Reference

Logic

SPI

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Voltage Regulator 1
 
Data Sheet 63 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
6.2 Functional Description
The Voltage Regulator 1 is always enabled in SBC Normal, SBC Stop and SBC Restart Mode and is disabled in
SBC Sleep and Fail-Safe Mode. 
The switched supply output pin is BCKSW, the voltage feedback pin is VCC1 for the step-down converter. 
Current Limitation Configurations:
The regulator can provide an output current depending on IBCKSW,lim. The current limitation threshold can be
adjusted with the bits ICC1_LIM_ADJ. A soft-start feature is implemented that limits the current to the lowest
value during start-up of VCC1 as long as RSTN is Low. After tRD1 has expired, the default value is resumed after
power-up or the configured value after SBC Sleep- or Fail-Safe Mode.
6.2.1 Pulse With Modulation (PWM) and Spread Spectrum Modulation
The fixed frequency pulse width modulation is based on a peak current mode to have a fast reaction time and
optimum load and line regulation. Buck regulator has a dedicated clock generation with a default frequency
of typ. 2.2MHz (default values). The switching frequency can be adjusted depending on the application
requirements via the SPI bits 2MHZ_FREQ.
A spread spectrum modulation of the integrated SMPS switching frequency is implemented for optimum EMC
behavior. Enabling and configuring the spread spectrum modulation frequency is done via the SPI bits
SS_MOD_FR.
6.2.2 Low-Power Mode Operation
For low-quiescent current reasons, a low-power linear mode regulator with a decreased accuracy (+/-3%) is
turned On in SBC Stop Mode if the load current on VCC1 falls below IVCC1   > IBCKSW,Ipeak1,f or IBCKSW,Ipeak2,f.
6.2.3 PWM to Low-Power Mode Handover
If SBC Stop Mode is reached and the load current on VCC1 falls below the active peak threshold (IBCKSW,Ipeak1,f
or IBCKSW,Ipeak2,f), then the low-quiescent current mode is activated by disabling the switch-mode regulator. 
If the load current on VCC1 exceeds  IVCC1   > IBCKSW,Ipeak1,r or IBCKSW,Ipeak2,r, then the switch-mode regulator is also
activated to support an optimum dynamic load behavior. The current consumption will then increase by typ.
3mA. The SBC Mode stays unchanged. 
If the load current on VCC1 falls below the selected threshold (IBCKSW,Ipeak1,f or IBCKSW,Ipeak2,f), then the low-
quiescent current mode is resumed again by disabling the high-power mode regulator. 
Two different active peak thresholds can be selected via SPI:
Table 21  Current Limitation Configurations
SPI Setting 
ICC1_LIM_ADJ
Typ. Limitation 
Current
Note
‘00’  0.75 A setting in case of lower load currents and smaller ext. components
‘01’  1.0 A default value, recommended setting
‘10’  1.2 A setting for maximum load currents 
‘11’  1.5 A setting not recommended - 

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Voltage Regulator 1

Data Sheet 64 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

•I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’(default): the lower VCC1 active peak threshold 1 is selected with lowest quiescent current

consumption in SBC Stop Mode (IStop_1,25, IStop_1,85);

•I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’: the higher VCC1 active peak threshold 2 is selected with an increased quiescent current

consumption in SBC Stop Mode (IStop_2,25, IStop_2,85);

6.2.4 External Components Selection

The DC/DC module is designed in order to give as much as possible flexibility in the final application in terms

of input and output voltage range, switching frequency. This reflects also in a large possible spread for system

passive components (L-C output filter).

System stability is guaranteed in the suggested range of output components values listed in Table 22.

Note: The above table specifies the range for each component individually. The proper combination of

components has to be chosen to ensure the targeted performance depending on the buck switching

frequency and load current profile. Above values are not subject to production test but specified by

design.

Table 22 External Components Selection Range

External Component Min. Value Characterization Max. Value

Inductor (Lout) 6.8µH 10µH 47µH

Capacitor (Cout) 10µF 22µF 22µF

ESR Cout - 100mΩ

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Voltage Regulator 1
 
Data Sheet 65 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
6.3 Electrical Characteristics 
Table 23 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
Regulated Voltage on VCC1 
including Line and Load 
Regulation
VCC1_1 4.9 5 5.1 V Buck in PWM; 
10µA < I VCC1  < 
300mA
P_6.3.1
Regulated Voltage on VCC1 
including Line and Load 
Regulation 
(Full Load Current Range)
VCC1_2 4.9 5 5.1 V Buck in PWM;
6V < VS < 28V; 
10µA < I VCC1  < 
500mA
P_6.3.24
Regulated Voltage on VCC1 
including Line and Load 
Regulation (Higher Accuracy 
Range)
VCC1_3 4.95 5 5.05 V 3)Buck in PWM
8V < VS < 18V;
25°C < Tj < 125°C;
20mA < I VCC1 < 
300mA
P_6.3.3
Regulated Voltage on VCC1 
including Line and Load 
Regulation 
(Low-Power Mode)
VCC1_4 4.8 5 5.2 V 3)Stop Mode, 
10µA < I VCC1 < 
I_PEAK_TH 
P_6.3.4
Buck Drop-Out Voltage VBUCK,D1 - - 500 mV IVCC1 = 250mA, 
VS = 5V 
P_6.3.7
Buck Switching Frequency 1 fBUCK,SW1 1.62 1.8 1.98 MHz 1)2MHZ_FREQ 
=’000’
P_6.3.10
Buck Switching Frequency 2 fBUCK,SW2 1.80 2.0 2.20 MHz 1)2MHZ_FREQ 
=’001’
P_6.3.11
Buck Switching Frequency 3 
(default value)
fBUCK,SW3 1.98 2.2 2.42 MHz 1)2MHZ_FREQ 
=’010’
P_6.3.12
Buck Switching Frequency 4 fBUCK,SW4 2.16 2.4 2.64 MHz 1)2MHZ_FREQ 
=’011’
P_6.3.13
Overcurrent Limitation 
(ICC1_LIM_ADJ= ‘01’)
IBCKSW,lim_01 0.8 1.0 1.25 A 3)2)current 
flowing out of 
pin, 
VCC1 = 0V, 
VS > 6V,
default value
P_6.3.14

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Voltage Regulator 1
 
Data Sheet 66 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Overcurrent Limitation 
(ICC1_LIM_ADJ= ‘00’)
IBCKSW,lim_00 0.6 0.75 0.95 A 3)2)current 
flowing out of 
pin, 
VCC1 = 0V,
VS > 6V
P_6.3.21
Overcurrent Limitation 
(ICC1_LIM_ADJ= ‘10’)
IBCKSW,lim_10 0.96 1.25 1.60 A 3)2)current 
flowing out of 
pin, 
VCC1 = 0V, 
VS > 6V
P_6.3.22
Overcurrent Limitation 
(ICC1_LIM_ADJ= ‘11’)
IBCKSW,lim_11 1.1 1.5 1.95 A 3)2)current 
flowing out of 
pin, 
VCC1 = 0V,
VS > 6V
P_6.3.23
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 
1 (Transition threshold 
between low-power and 
high-power mode regulator)
IBCKSW,Ipeak1,r 1.5 3.25 5.0 mA 3) ICC1 rising; 
VS = 13.5V;
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’
P_6.3.18
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 
1 (Transition threshold 
between high-power and 
low-power mode regulator)
IBCKSW,Ipeak1,f 1.2 2.3 3.5 mA 3) ICC1 falling; 
VS = 13.5V; 
I_PEAK_TH = ‘0’
P_6.3.15
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 
2 (Transition threshold 
between low-power and 
high-power mode regulator)
IBCKSW,Ipeak2,r 2.5 6.25 10.0 mA 3) ICC1 rising; 
VS = 13.5V;
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’
P_6.3.16
VCC1 Active Peak Threshold 
2 (Transition threshold 
between high-power and 
low-power mode regulator)
IBCKSW,Ipeak2,f 2.2 4.5 8 mA 3) ICC1 falling; 
VS = 13.5V;
I_PEAK_TH = ‘1’
P_6.3.17
1) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.
2) Current limitation value is max. 20% higher for VPOR,f < VS < 6 V to optimize low-drop operation behavior. 
3) Not subject to production test, specified by design.
Table 23 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Voltage Regulator 2

Data Sheet 67 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

7 Voltage Regulator 2

7.1 Block Description

Figure 20 Module Block Diagram

Functional Features

• 5 V low drop-out linear voltage regulator

• Protected against short to battery voltage, e.g. for off-board sensor supply

• Can also be used for CAN supply

• VCC2 undervoltage monitoring. Please refer to Chapter 12.7 for more information

• Can be active in SBC Normal, SBC Stop, and SBC Sleep Mode (not SBC Fail-Safe Mode)

• VCC2 switches Off after entering SBC Restart Mode. Switch Off is latched, LDO must be enabled via SPI after

shutdown.

• Overtemperature protection

•≥ 470nF ceramic capacitor at output voltage for stability, with ESR < 1Ω @ f = 10 kHz, to achieve the voltage

regulator control loop stability based on the safe phase margin (bode diagram).

• Output current capability up to IVCC2,lim.

GND

Overt emperature

Shutdown

Bandgap

Reference

State

Machine

VCC2

INH

Vref

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Voltage Regulator 2

Data Sheet 68 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

7.2 Functional Description

In SBC Normal Mode VCC2 can be switched On or Off via SPI.

For SBC Stop- or Sleep Mode, the VCC2 has to be switched On or Off in SBC Normal Mode before entering the

respective SBC mode. The regulator is automatically switched Off in SBC Restart Mode

The regulator can provide an output current up to IVCC2,lim.

For low-quiescent current reasons, the output voltage accuracy is decreased in SBC Stop and Sleep Mode (if

enabled) because a low-power mode regulator with a lower accuracy (VCC2,out4) is active for small loads. If the

load current on VCC2 exceeds IVCC2 > IVCC2,Ipeak,r then the high-power mode regulator will also be enabled to

support an optimum dynamic load behavior. The current consumption increases by typ. 2.9mA. The SBC Mode

stays unchanged.

If the load current on VCC2 falls below the threshold (IVCC2 < IVCC2,Ipeak,f), then the low-quiescent current mode

is resumed by disabling the high-power mode regulator.

Both regulators are active in SBC Normal Mode.

Note: If the VCC2 output voltage is supplying external off-board loads, the application must consider the

series resonance circuit built by cable inductance and decoupling capacitor at the load. Sufficient

damping must be provided.

Note: To avoid excessive repetitive short-circuit conditions, It is recommended to detect the shutdown

reason for VCC2 and keep the regulator Off after multiple over-temperature shutdowns.

7.2.1 Short to Battery Protection

The output stage is protected for short to VBAT. No inverse current flows if the voltage on VCC2 is higher than

the nominal output voltage.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Voltage Regulator 2
 
Data Sheet 69 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
7.3 Electrical Characteristics
Table 24 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
 (unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or Test Condition Number
Min. Typ. Max.
Output Voltage Including Line 
and Load Regulation 
(Full Load Current Range)
VCC2,out1 4.9 5.0 5.1 V 1)SBC Normal Mode; 
10µA < IVCC2 < 100mA
6V < VS < 28V
1) In SBC Stop Mode, the specified output voltage tolerance applies when IVCC2 has exceeded the selected active peak 
threshold (IVCC2,Ipeak,r) but with increased current consumption.
P_8.3.1
Output Voltage Including Line 
and Load Regulation
VCC2,out2 4.9 5.0 5.1 V 1)SBC Normal Mode; 
10µA < IVCC2 < 50mA  
P_8.3.2
Output Voltage Including Line 
and Load Regulation 
(Higher Accuracy Range)
VCC2,out3 4.95 5.0 5.05 V 2)SBC Normal Mode; 
10µA < IVCC2 < 5mA
8V < VS < 18V
2) Not subject to production test, specified by design.
P_8.3.3
Output Voltage Including Line 
and Load Regulation 
(Low-Power Mode)
VCC2,out4 4.9 5.05 5.2 V SBC Stop / Sleep Mode;
10µA < IVCC2 < IVCC2,Ipeak
P_8.3.4
 Drop-Out Voltage VCC2,d1 – – 500 mV IVCC2 = 30mA 
VS = 5V
P_8.3.5
VCC2 Active Peak Threshold 
(Transition threshold 
between low-power and high-
power mode regulator)
IVCC2,Ipeak,r 2.3 3.3 4.4 mA 2)ICC2 rising; 
VS = 13.5V; 
P_8.3.6
VCC2 Active Peak Threshold 
(Transition threshold 
between high-power and low-
power mode regulator)
IVCC2,Ipeak,f 1.4 2.2 3.2 mA 2)ICC2 falling; 
VS = 13.5V; 
P_8.3.7
Overcurrent limitation IVCC2,lim 100 – 450 mA 2)current flowing out of 
pin, VCC2 = 0V
P_8.3.8

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Voltage Regulator 2

Data Sheet 70 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 21 Typical on-resistance of VCC2 pass device during linear (RON) mode for ICC2 = 30mA

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Voltage Regulator 2

Data Sheet 71 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 22 On-resistance range of VCC2 pass device during linear (RON) mode for ICC2 = 50mA

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 72 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

8 High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

8.1 Block Description

Figure 23 Functional Block Diagram

8.2 Functional Description

The Controller Area Network (CAN) transceiver part of the SBC provides High-Speed (HS) differential mode

data transmission (up to 2Mbaud) and reception in automotive and industrial applications. It works as an

interface between the CAN protocol controller and the physical bus lines compatible to ISO 11898-2:2016 and

SAE J2284.

The CAN FD transceiver offers low-power modes to reduce current consumption. This supports networks with

partially powered down nodes. To support software diagnostic functions, a CAN Receive-only Mode is

implemented.

It is designed to provide excellent passive behavior when the transceiver is switched Off (mixed networks,

clamp 15/30 applications).

A wake-up from the CAN Wake Capable Mode is possible via a message on the bus. Thus, the microcontroller

can be powered down or idled and is woken up by the CAN bus activities.

The CAN transceiver is designed to withstand the severe conditions of automotive applications and to support

12V applications.

The transceiver can also be configured to Wake Capable in order to save current and to ensure a safe transition

from Normal to Sleep Mode (to avoid losing messages).

TXDCAN

Output

Stage

Driver

Temp.-

Protection

CANH

CANL +

timeout

RXDCAN

Receiver

MUX

CC 1

SPI Mode

Control

To SPI diagnostic

VCAN

CC1

Wake

Receiver

VCAN

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 73 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 24 shows the possible transceiver mode transition when changing the SBC mode.

Figure 24 CAN Mode Control Diagram

CAN FD Support

CAN FD stands for ‘CAN with Flexible Data Rate’. It is based on the well-established CAN protocol as specified

in ISO 11898-1. CAN FD still uses the CAN bus arbitration method. The benefit is that the bit rate can be

increased by switching to a shorter bit time at the end of the arbitration process and then to return to the

longer bit time at the CRC delimiter, before the receivers transmit their acknowledge bits. See also Figure 25.

In addition, the effective data rate is increased by allowing longer data fields. CAN FD allows the transmission

of up to 64 data bytes compared to the 8 data bytes from the standard CAN.

Figure 25 Bite Rate Increase with CAN FD vs. Standard CAN

Not only the physical layer must support CAN FD but also the CAN controller. In case the CAN controller is not

able to support CAN FD then the respective CAN node must at least tolerate CAN FD communication. This CAN

FD tolerant mode is realized in the physical layer.

SBC Normal Mode

SBC Mode CAN Transceiver Mode

SBC Stop Mode

SBC Sleep Mode

SBC Restart Mode

Receive Only Normal Mode OFFWake Capable

Receive Only OFFWake Capable

OFFWoken

OFFWake Capable

after a wake event on CAN Bus

Normal Mode

Behavior after SBC Restart Mode - not coming from SBC Sleep Mode due to a wake up of the respective transceiver:

If the transceivers had been configured to Normal Mode, or Receive Only Mode, then the mode will be changed to Wake

Capable. If it was Wake Capable, then it will remain Wake Capable. If it had been OFF before SBC Restart Mode, then it

will remain OFF.

Behavior in SBC Development Mode:

CAN default value in SBC INIT MODE and entering SBC Normal Mode from SBC Init Mode is ON instead of OFF.

SBC Fail-Safe Mode Wake Capable

Example:

- 11bit identifier + 8Byte data

- Arbitration Phase 500kbps

- Data Phase 2Mbps

average bit rate 1.14Mbps

CAN Header Data phase

(Byte 0 – Byte 7) CAN Footer

Standard CAN

message

CAN Header Data phase

(Byte 0 – Byte 7) CAN Footer

CAN FD with

reduced bit time

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 74 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

8.2.1 CAN Off Mode

The CAN Off Mode is the default mode after power-up of the SBC. It is available in all SBC Modes and is

intended to completely stop CAN activities or when CAN communication is not needed. In CAN Off Mode, a

wake-up event on the bus is ignored.

8.2.2 CAN Normal Mode

The CAN Transceiver is enabled via SPI. CAN Normal Mode is designed for normal data transmission/reception

within the HS CAN network. The Mode is available in SBC Normal Mode.

Transmission:

The signal from the microcontroller is applied to the TXDCAN input of the SBC. The bus driver switches the

CANH/L output stages to transfer this input signal to the CAN bus lines.

Enabling sequence:

The CAN transceiver requires an enabling time tCAN,EN before a message can be sent on the bus. This means

that the TXDCAN signal can only be pulled Low after the enabling time. If this is not ensured, then the TXDCAN

needs to be set back to High (=recessive) until the enabling time is completed. Only the next dominant bit is

transmitted on the bus. Figure 26 shows different scenarios and explanations for CAN enabling.

Figure 26 CAN Transceiver Enabling Sequence

Reduced Electromagnetic Emission:

To reduce electromagnetic emissions (EME), the bus driver controls CANH/L slopes symmetrically.

Reception:

Analog CAN bus signals are converted into digital signals at RXDCAN via the differential input receiver.

CANDIF F

CAN ,EN

TXDCAN

CAN

Mode

CAN

NO RMA L

CAN

OFF

CAN,EN

recessive TXDCAN

level r equir ed bevor

start of transmission

CAN, EN

not ensur ed , no

tr ansm i ssi on on bus

CAN,EN

Cor r ect sequence ,

Bus i s enabl ed after t

CAN, EN

not ensured ,

no tr ansmission on bus

recessive

TXDCAN

level required

Dominant

Recessive

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 75 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

8.2.3 CAN Receive Only Mode

In CAN Receive Only Mode (RX only), the driver stage is de-activated but reception is still operational. This

mode is accessible by an SPI command in SBC Normal Mode and in SBC Stop Mode.

Note: The transceiver is still properly working in Receive Only mode even if VCAN is not available because

of an independent receiver supply.

8.2.4 CAN Wake Capable Mode

This mode can be used in SBC Stop, Sleep, Restart and Normal Mode by programming via SPI and it is used to

monitor bus activities. It is automatically accessed in SBC Fail-Safe Mode. A wake-up signal on the bus results

in a change of behavior of the SBC, as described in Table 25. As a signalization to the microcontroller, the

RXDCAN pin is set Low and stays Low until the CAN transceiver is changed to any other mode. After a wake-up

event, the transceiver can be switched to CAN Normal Mode via SPI for bus communication.

As shown in Figure 27, a wake-up pattern (WUP) is signalled on the bus by two consecutive dominant bus

levels for at least tWake1 (wake-up time) and less than tWake2, each separated by a recessive bus level of greater

than tWake1 and shorter than tWake2.

Figure 27 CAN Wake-up Pattern Detection according to the Definition in ISO 11898-2

Rearming the Transceiver for Wake Capability:

After a BUS wake-up event, the transceiver is woken. However, the CAN transceiver mode bits will still show

Wake Capable (=‘01’) so that the RXDCAN signal is pulled Low. There are two possibilities how the CAN

transceiver’s Wake Capable mode is enabled again after a wake-up event:

• The CAN transceiver mode must be toggled, i.e. switched from Wake Capable Mode to CAN Normal Mode,

CAN Receive Only Mode or CAN Off, before switching to CAN Wake Capable Mode again.

Ini

Bias off

Bias on

Wait

Bias off

Bus recessive > t

WAKE1

Bus dominant > t

WAKE1

optional:

WAKE2

expired

Bus recessive > t

WAKE1

Bus dominant > t

WAKE1

optional:

WAKE2

expired

Entering CAN Normal

or CAN Recive Only

Entering CAN wake

capable

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 76 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

• Rearming is done automatically when the SBC is changed to SBC Stop, SBC Sleep, or SBC Fail-Safe Mode

to ensure wake-up capability.

Wake-Up in SBC Stop and Normal Mode:

In SBC Stop Mode, if a wake-up is detected, it is always signaled by the INTN output and in the WK_STAT_0 SPI

microcontroller needs to set the device from SBC Stop Mode to SBC Normal Mode, there is no automatic

transition to Normal Mode.

For functional safety reasons, the watchdog is automatically enabled in SBC Stop Mode after a Bus wake-up

event in case it was disabled before (if bit WD_EN_ WK_BUS was configured to High before).

Wake-Up in SBC Sleep Mode:

Wake-up is possible via a CAN message. The wake-up automatically transfers the SBC into the SBC Restart

Mode and from there to Normal Mode the corresponding RXDCAN pin is set to Low. The microcontroller is able

to detect the Low signal on RXDCAN and to read the wake source out of the WK_STAT_0 register via SPI. No

interrupt is generated when coming out of Sleep Mode. The microcontroller can now for example switch the

CAN transceiver into CAN Normal Mode via SPI to start communication.

8.2.5 CAN Bus termination

In accordance with the CAN configuration, four types of bus terminations are allowed:

•CAN Normal Mode

: VCAN/2 termination;

•CAN Receive Only Mode

: VCAN/2 termination in case that VCAN is nominal supply;

when VCAN UV is detected, the termination is 2.5V;

•CAN Wake Capable

: GND termination: after wake-up, the termination is 2.5V;

•CAN Off

: no termination necessary (bus floating).

When entering CAN Wake Capable mode the termination is only connected to GND only after the t_silence

time has expired.

8.2.6 TXD Time-out Feature

If the TXDCAN signal is dominant for a time t > tTXDCAN_TO, in CAN Normal Mode, the TXDCAN time-out function

deactivates the transmission of the signal at the bus setting the TXDCAN pin to recessive. This is implemented

to prevent the bus from being blocked permanently due to an error. The transmitter is disabled and thus

switched to recessive state. The CAN SPI control bits (CAN on BUS_CTRL_0) remain unchanged and the failure

is stored in the SPI flag CAN_FAIL. The CAN transmitter stage is activated again after the dominant time-out

condition is removed and the transceiver is automatically switched back to CAN Normal Mode.

Table 25 Action due to CAN Bus Wake-Up

SBC Mode SBC Mode after Wake-up VCC1 INTN RXDCAN

Normal Mode Normal Mode On Low Low

Stop Mode Stop Mode On Low Low

Sleep Mode Restart Mode Ramping Up High Low

Restart Mode Restart Mode On High Low

Fail-Safe Mode Restart Mode Ramping Up High Low

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 77 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

8.2.7 Bus Dominant Clamping

If the HS CAN bus signal is dominant for a time t > tBUS_CAN_TO,in CAN Normal and Receive Only Mode a bus

dominant clamping is detected and the SPI bit CAN_FAIL is set. The transceiver configuration stays

unchanged. In order to avoid that a bus dominant clamping is detected due to a TXD time-out the bus

dominant clamping filter time tBUS_CAN_TO > tTXDCAN_TO.

8.2.8 Undervoltage Detection

The voltage at the CAN supply pin is monitored in CAN Normal and Receive Only Mode. In case of VCAN

undervoltage a signalization via SPI bit VCAN_UV is triggered and the TLE9471-3ES disables the transmitter

stage. If the CAN supply reaches a higher level than the undervoltage detection threshold (VCAN > VCAN_UV,r),

the transceiver is automatically switched back to CAN Normal Mode.

The undervoltage detection is enabled if the mode bit CAN_1 = ‘1’, i.e. in CAN Normal or CAN Receive Only

Mode.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver
 
Data Sheet 78 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
8.3 Electrical Characteristics 
Table 26 Electrical Characteristics
Tj = -40°C to +150°C; VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; VCAN = 4.75 V to 5.25 V; RL = 60 Ω; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or Test Condition Number
Min. Typ. Max.
CAN Bus Receiver
Differential Receiver 
Threshold Voltage,
recessive to dominant edge 
Vdiff,rd_N – 0.80 0.90 V Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL; 
-12V ≤ VCM(CAN) ≤ 12V;
0.9V ≤ Vdiff,D_Range ≤ 8V;
CAN Normal Mode 
P_9.3.2
Differential Receiver 
Threshold Voltage,
dominant to recessive edge
Vdiff,dr_N 0.50 0.60 – V Vdiff = VCANH -VCANL;
-12V ≤ VCM(CAN) ≤ 12V;
-3V ≤ Vdiff,D_Range ≤ 0.5V;
CAN Normal Mode
P_9.3.3
Common Mode Range CMR -12 – 12 V 3) P_9.3.4
CANH, CANL Input 
Resistance
Rin 20 40 50 kΩCAN Normal / Wake 
Capable Mode;
Recessive state; 
-2 V ≤ VCANL/H ≤ +7 V
P_9.3.5
Differential Input 
Resistance
Rin_diff 40 80 100 kΩCAN Normal / Wake 
Capable Mode;
Recessive state;
-2 V ≤ VCANL/H ≤ +7 V
P_9.3.6
Input Resistance Deviation 
between CANH and CANL
DRi-3 – 3 % 3)Recessive state
VCANL = VCANL/H = 5V
P_9.3.7
Input Capacitance CANH, 
CANL versus GND
Cin – 2040pF
3)VTXDCAN = 5V P_9.3.8
Differential Input 
Capacitance 
Cin_diff – 1020pF
3)VTXDCAN = 5V P_9.3.9
Wake-up Receiver
Threshold Voltage,
recessive to dominant edge
Vdiff, rd_W – 0.8 1.15 V -12V ≤ VCM(CAN) ≤ 12V;
1.15V ≤ Vdiff,D_Range ≤ 8V;
CAN Wake Capable 
Mode
P_9.3.10
Wake-up Receiver
Threshold Voltage,
dominant to recessive edge
Vdiff, dr_W 0.4 0.7 – V -12V ≤ VCM(CAN) ≤ 12V;
-3V ≤ Vdiff,D_Range ≤ 0.4V;
CAN Wake Capable 
Mode
P_9.3.11
CAN Bus Transmitter
CANH/CANL Recessive 
Output Voltage
(CAN Normal Mode)
VCANL/H_NM 2.0 – 3.0 V CAN Normal Mode
VTXDCAN = Vcc1;
no load
P_9.3.12

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver
 
Data Sheet 79 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
CANH/CANL Recessive 
Output Voltage
(CAN Wake Capable Mode)
VCANL/H_LP -0.1 – 0.1 V CAN Wake Capable 
Mode;
VTXDCAN = Vcc1;
no load
P_9.3.13
CANH, CANL Recessive 
Output Voltage Difference
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL
(CAN Normal Mode)
Vdiff_r_N -500 – 50 mV CAN Normal Mode;
VTXDCAN = Vcc1;
no load
P_9.3.14
CANH, CANL Recessive 
Output Voltage Difference
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL
(CAN Wake Capable Mode)
Vdiff_r_W -200 – 50  mV CAN Wake Capable 
Mode;
VTXDCAN = Vcc1;
no load
P_9.3.15
CANL Dominant Output 
Voltage
VCANL 0.5 – 2.25 V CAN Normal Mode;
VTXDCAN = 0V;
VCAN = 5V;
50Ω ≤ RL ≤ 65Ω
P_9.3.16
CANH Dominant Output 
Voltage
VCANH 2.75 – 4.5 V CAN Normal Mode;
VTXDCAN = 0V; 
VCAN = 5V;
50Ω ≤ RL ≤ 65Ω
P_9.3.17
CANH, CANL Dominant 
Output Voltage Difference
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL
Vdiff_d_N 1.5 – 3.0 V CAN Normal Mode;
VTXDCAN = 0V;
VCAN = 5V;
50Ω ≤ RL ≤ 65Ω
P_9.3.18
CANH, CANL Dominant 
Output Voltage Difference 
(resistance during 
arbitration)
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL
Vdiff_d_N 1.5 – 5.0 V 3)CAN Normal Mode;
VTXDCAN = 0V;
VCAN = 5V;
RL = 2240Ω
P_9.3.51
CANH, CANL Dominant 
Output Voltage Difference 
(extended bus load range)
Vdiff = VCANH - VCANL
Vdiff_d_N 1.4 – 3.3 V 3)CAN Normal Mode;
VTXDCAN = 0V;
VCAN = 5V;
45Ω ≤ RL ≤ 70Ω
P_9.3.52
Driver Symmetry
VSYM = VCANH + VCANL
VSYM 4.5 – 5.5 V 1)CAN Normal Mode;
VTXDCAN = 0V / 5V;
VCAN = 5V;
CSPLIT = 4.7nF;
50Ω ≤ RL ≤ 60Ω; 
P_9.3.19
Table 26 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
Tj = -40°C to +150°C; VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; VCAN = 4.75 V to 5.25 V; RL = 60 Ω; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or Test Condition Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver
 
Data Sheet 80 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
CANH Short Circuit Current
(New ISO requirement)
ICANHsc -100 -80 -50 mA CAN Normal Mode; 
VCANHshort = -3 V; 
VCAN = 5 V
P_9.3.20
CANL Short Circuit Current
(New ISO requirement)
ICANLsc 50 80 100 mA CAN Normal Mode; 
VCANLshort = 18 V; 
VCAN = 5 V
P_9.3.21
Leakage Current ICANH,lk
ICANL,lk
–25µAVS = VCAN = 0V; 
0V ≤ VCANH,L ≤ 5V; 
2)Rtest = 0 / 47kΩ
P_9.3.22
Receiver Output RXDCAN
High-level Output Voltage VRXDCAN,H 0.8 × 
VCC1
– – V CAN Normal Mode;
IRXDCAN = -2 mA
P_9.3.23
Low-level Output Voltage VRXDCAN,L ––0.2 ×  
Vcc1
V CAN Normal Mode;
IRXDCAN = 2 mA
P_9.3.24
Transmission Input TXDCAN
High-level Input Voltage 
Threshold
VTXDCAN,H ––0.7 × 
Vcc1
V CAN Normal Mode;
recessive state
P_9.3.25
Low-level Input Voltage 
Threshold
VTXDCAN,L 0.3 ×  
Vcc1
– – V CAN Normal Mode;
dominant state
P_9.3.26
TXDCAN Input Hysteresis VTXDCAN,hys 0.08 ×  
Vcc1
0.12 ×  
Vcc1
0.4 ×  
Vcc1
mV 3) P_9.3.27
TXDCAN Pull-up Resistance RTXDCAN 25 40 75 kΩ-P_9.3.28
CAN Transceiver Enabling 
Time
tCAN,EN 8 1218µs
7) CSN = High to first 
valid transmitted 
TXDCAN dominant
P_9.3.29
Dynamic CAN-Transceiver Characteristics
Min. Dominant Time for Bus 
Wake-up 
tWake1 0.5 1.2 1.8 µs -12V ≤ VCM(CAN) ≤ 12V;
CAN Wake Capable 
Mode
P_9.3.53
Wake-up Time-out, 
Recessive Bus
tWake2 0.8 – 10 ms 7)CAN Wake Capable 
Mode
P_9.3.31
Wake-up reaction time 
(WUP or WUF)
tWU_WUP/WUF – – 100 µs 7)4)5) Wake-up reaction 
time after a valid WUP 
or WUF;
P_9.3.54
Loop delay
 (recessive to dominant)
tLOOP,f – 150 255 ns 1)CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60 Ω; 
VCAN = 5V;
CRXDCAN = 15 pF
P_9.3.32
Table 26 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
Tj = -40°C to +150°C; VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; VCAN = 4.75 V to 5.25 V; RL = 60 Ω; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or Test Condition Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver
 
Data Sheet 81 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Loop delay
 (dominant to recessive)
tLOOP,r – 150 255 ns 1)CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60Ω; 
VCAN = 5V;
CRXDCAN = 15 pF
P_9.3.33
Propagation Delay
TXDCAN Low to bus 
dominant
td(L),T – 90 140 ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60 Ω; 
VCAN = 5V 
P_9.3.34
Propagation Delay
TXDCAN High to bus 
recessive
td(H),T – 100 140 ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60 Ω; 
VCAN = 5V 
P_9.3.35
Propagation Delay
bus dominant to RXDCAN 
Low
td(L),R – 100 – ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60Ω; 
VCAN = 5V;
CRXDCAN = 15 pF
P_9.3.36
Propagation Delay
bus recessive to RXDCAN 
High
td(H),R – 100 – ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60Ω; 
VCAN = 5V;
CRXDCAN = 15 pF
P_9.3.37
Received Recessive bit 
width 
(CAN FD up to 2Mbps)
tbit(RXD) 400 – 550 ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60Ω ;
VCAN = 5V; 
CRXD = 15pF;
tbit(TXD) = 500ns;
Parameter definition 
in according to 
Figure 29.
P_9.3.38
Transmitted Recessive bit 
width 
(CAN FD up to 2Mbps)
tbit(BUS) 435 – 530 ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60 Ω;
VCAN = 5 V; 
CRXD = 15 pF; 
tbit(TXD) = 500ns;
Parameter definition 
in according to 
Figure 29.
P_9.3.43
Table 26 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
Tj = -40°C to +150°C; VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; VCAN = 4.75 V to 5.25 V; RL = 60 Ω; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or Test Condition Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver
 
Data Sheet 82 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Receiver timing symmetry 
(CAN FD up to 2Mbps) 
∆tRec -65 – 40 ns 6) CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60Ω; 
VCAN = 5V; 
CRXD = 15pF; 
tbit(TXD) = 500ns;
Parameter definition 
in according to 
Figure 29.
P_9.3.44
Received Recessive bit 
width 
(CAN FD up to 5Mbps)
tbit(RXD) 120 – 220 ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60Ω ;
VCAN = 5V; 
CRXD = 15pF;
tbit(TXD) = 200ns;
Parameter definition 
in according to 
Figure 29.
P_9.3.45
Transmitted Recessive bit 
width
(CAN FD up to 5Mbps)
tbit(BUS) 155 – 210 ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60 Ω;
VCAN = 5 V; 
CRXD = 15 pF; 
tbit(TXD) = 200ns;
Parameter definition 
in according to 
Figure 29.
P_9.3.46
Receiver timing symmetry 
(CAN FD up to 5Mbps)
∆tRec -45 – 15 ns CAN Normal Mode;
CL = 100pF;
RL = 60Ω; 
VCAN = 5V; 
CRXD = 15pF; 
tbit(TXD) = 200ns;
Parameter definition 
in according to 
Figure 29.
P_9.3.47
TXDCAN Permanent 
Dominant Time-out
tTXDCAN_TO 1.6 2.0 2.4 ms 7)CAN Normal Mode P_9.3.39
BUS Permanent Dominant 
Time-out
tBUS_CAN_TO 2.0 2.5 3.0 ms 7)CAN Normal Mode P_9.3.40
Table 26 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
Tj = -40°C to +150°C; VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; VCAN = 4.75 V to 5.25 V; RL = 60 Ω; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with
respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or Test Condition Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 83 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 28 Timing Diagrams for Dynamic Characteristics

Timeout for bus inactivity tSILENCE 0.6 – 1.2 s 7) P_9.3.48

Bus Bias reaction time tBias – – 250 µs 7) P_9.3.49

1) VSYM shall be observed during dominant and recessive state and also during the transition dominant to recessive and

vice versa while TXD is simulated by a square signal (50% duty cycle) with a frequency of up to 1 MHz (2 MBit/s);

2) Rtest between (Vs /VCAN) and 0V (GND);

3) Not subject to production test, specified by design;

4) Wake-up is signalized via INTN pin activation in SBC Stop Mode and via VCC1 ramping up with wake from SBC Sleep

Mode;

5) For WUP: time starts with end of last dominant phase of WUP; for WUF: time starts with end of CRC delimiter of the

WUF

6) ∆tRec=tbit(RXD) -tbit(BUS).

7) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.

Table 26 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)

Tj = -40°C to +150°C; VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; VCAN = 4.75 V to 5.25 V; RL = 60 Ω; CAN Normal Mode; all voltages with

respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin

(unless otherwise specified)

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or Test Condition Number

Min. Typ. Max.

d(L),R

VDI F F

LOOP,f

d(H),R

LO O P,r

d(L), T

GND

TXDCAN

Vcc1

d(H), T

Vdiff, rd_N Vdiff , dr_N

GND

0.2 x Vcc1

0.8 x Vcc1

VRXDCAN

cc1

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Speed CAN FD Transceiver

Data Sheet 84 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 29 From ISO 11898-2: tloop, tbit(TXD), tbit(Bus), tbit(RXD) definitions

500mV

TXDCAN

70%

30%

RXDCAN

diff

=CANH-CANL

30%

70%

900mV

5x t

Bit(TXD)

Loop_f

Bit(Bus)

Loop_r

Bit(RXD)

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Voltage Wake and Voltage Monitoring Input

Data Sheet 85 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

9 High-Voltage Wake and Voltage Monitoring Input

9.1 Block Description

Figure 30 Wake Input Block Diagram

Features

• High-Voltage input with a 3V (typ.) threshold voltage

• Alternate measurement feature for high-voltage sensing via pins WK/SENSE and FO/GPIO

• Wake-up capability for power saving modes

• Edge sensitive wake-up feature Low to High and High to Low

• Pull-up and Pull-down current sources, configurable via SPI

• Selectable configuration for Static Sense or cyclic sense working with TIMER

• In SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode the level of the WK pin can be read via SPI

tWK

WK/

VSENSE

Vint

Control Logic

IPD_WK

IPU_WK

VRef

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Voltage Wake and Voltage Monitoring Input

Data Sheet 86 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

9.2 High-Voltage Wake Function

9.2.1 Functional Description

The wake input pin is edge-sensitive inputs with a switching threshold of typically 3V. Both transitions, High

to Low and Low to High, result in a signalization by the SBC. The signalization occurs either by triggering the

interrupt in SBC Normal Mode and SBC Stop Mode or by a wake-up of the device in SBC Sleep and SBC Fail-

Safe Mode.

Two different wake-up detection modes can be selected via SPI:

• Static Sense: WK inputs are always active

• Cyclic Sense: WK inputs are only active for a certain time period (see Chapter 5.2.1)

A filter time of 16µs is implemented to avoid an unintentional wake-up due to transients or EMI disturbances

in Static Sense configuration.

The filter time (tFWK1) is triggered by a level change crossing the switching threshold and a wake signal is

recognized if the input level does not cross again the threshold during the selected filter time.

Figure 31 shows a typical wake-up timing and filtering of transient pulses.

Figure 31 Wake-up Filter Timing for Static Sense

The wake-up capability of the WK pin can be enabled or disabled via SPI command in the WK_CTRL_1 register.

A wake-up event via the WK pin can always be read in the register WK_STAT_0 at the bit WK_WU.

The actual voltage level of the WK pin (Low or High) can always be read in SBC Normal and SBC Stop-, and Init

Mode in the register WK_LVL_STAT. During Cyclic Sense, the register shows the sampled levels of the

respective WK pin.

If FO/GPIO is configured as WK input in its alternative function (16µs static filter time), then the wake-up events

are signalled in the register WK_STAT_1.

WK,th

WK,f

No Wake Event Wake Event

WK,th

WK,f

INT

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Voltage Wake and Voltage Monitoring Input

Data Sheet 87 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

9.2.2 Wake Input Configuration

To ensure a defined and stable voltage levels at the internal comparator input it is possible to configure

integrated current sources via the SPI register WK_PUPD_CTRL. An example illustration for the automatic

switching configuration is shown in Figure 32.

Note: If there is no pull-up or pull-down configured on the WK input, then the respective input should be

tied to GND or VS on board to avoid unintended floating of the pin and subsequent wake-up events.

Figure 32 Illustration for Pull-Up / Down Current Sources with Automatic Switching Configuration

Table 27 Pull-Up / Pull-Down Resistor

WKx_PUPD_

Current Sources Note

00no current

source

WK input is floating if left open (default setting)

0 1 pull-down WK input internally pulled to GND

1 0 pull-up WK input internally pulled to internal 5V supply

1 1 Automatic

switching

If a High level is detected at the WK input the pull-up source

is activated, if Low level is detected the pull down is

activated.

WKth _mi n

WKth _max

WKth

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
High-Voltage Wake and Voltage Monitoring Input
 
Data Sheet 88 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
9.2.3 Wake configuration for Cyclic Sense
The wake input pin can also be used for cyclical sensing of monitoring signals during low-power modes. For
this function the WK input performs a cyclic sensing of the voltage level during the On-time of the GPIO HS. 
A transition of the voltage level triggers a wake-up event. 
In order to enable this functionality the GPIO must be configured as HS to be controlled by the Timer. 
See also Chapter 5.2.1 and Chapter 11.1.2 for more details.
9.2.4 High-Voltage Sensing as Alternate Function 
This function provides the possibility to measure a voltage, e.g. the unbuffered battery voltage, with the
protected WK HV-input pin. The measured voltage is routed out at FO/GPIO.
If this function is enabled with the WK_MEAS then neither the FO (including the FO test via FO_ON), nor the
GPIO functionality nor the WK functionality are available.
If the measurement function is enabled then following items should be noted:
• The internal pull-up / pull-down structures are disabled and the internal WK signal is gated (blocked)
• The settings for WK in the registers WK_PUPD_CTRL and WK_CTRL_1 are ignored (but changing the 
settings is not prevented)
• The wake capability and voltage monitoring of the WK pin is disabled, i.e. WK_STAT_0 and WK_LVL_STAT 
are not updated, i.e. the bits in WK_LVL_STAT are cleared
• If WK is the only valid wake source then the SPI_FAIL flag is set when trying to enter SBC Sleep Mode (see 
also Chapter 5.1) and SBC Restart Mode is entered
Please refer to Chapter 5.4 for more details on the functionality of the measurement unit.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

High-Voltage Wake and Voltage Monitoring Input

Data Sheet 89 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

9.3 Electrical Characteristics

Table 28 Electrical Characteristics

VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin

(unless otherwise specified)

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

WK Input Pin Characteristics

Wake-up/monitoring

threshold voltage

VWKth 2 3 4 V without external

serial resistor RS

(with RS:

DeltaV = IPD/PU × RS);

hysteresis included

P_10.3.1

Threshold hysteresis VWKNth,hys 0.1 - 0.7 V without external

serial resistor RS (with

RS: DeltaV = IPD/PU × RS)

P_10.3.2

WK pin Pull-up Current IPU_WK -20 -10 -3 µA VWK_IN = 4V P_10.3.3

WK pin Pull-down

Current

IPD_WK 31020µAVWK_IN = 2V P_10.3.4

Input leakage current ILK,l -2 2 µA 0 V < VWK_IN < 40V P_10.3.5

Timing

Wake-up filter time 1 tFWK1 13 16 20 µs 1)

1) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance

P_10.3.6

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Interrupt Function
 
Data Sheet 90 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
10 Interrupt Function
10.1 Block and Functional Description
Figure 33  Interrupt Block Diagram
The interrupt is used to signalize special events in real time to the microcontroller. The interrupt block is
designed as a push/pull output stage as shown in Figure 33. An interrupt is triggered and the INTN pin is pulled
Low (active Low) for tINTN in SBC Normal and Stop Mode and it is released once tINTN is expired. The minimum
High-time of INTN between two consecutive interrupts is tINTND. An interrupt does not cause a SBC mode
change.
Two different interrupt classes could be selected via the SPI bit INT_ GLOBAL:
• Class 1 (wake interrupt - INT_ GLOBAL=0): all wake-up events stored in the wake status SPI registers 
(WK_STAT_0 and WK_STAT_1 if GPIO is configured as WK) cause an interrupt. The wake sources are listed 
below.
An interrupt is only triggered if the respective function is also enabled as a wake source (including GPIOx if 
configured as a wake input). The CAN time out signalization CANTO is also considered as a wake source. 
Therefore, the interrupt mask bit CANTO_ MASK has higher priority than the bit INT_ GLOBAL, i.e. the bit is 
not taken into account for CANTO.
– via CAN (wake-up or CAN Bus time out)
–via the WK pin
–via TIMER
– via GPIO (if configured as WK input)
• Class 2 (global interrupt - INT_ GLOBAL=1): in addition to the wake-up events, all signalled failures stored 
in the other status registers trigger an interrupt (the registers WK_LVL_STAT and FAM_PROD_STAT are not 
generating interrupts, neither will the selective wake registers SWK_STAT, SWK_OSC_CAL_H_STAT, 
SWK_OSC_CAL_L_STAT, SWK_ECNT_STAT, SWK_CDR_CTRL1, SWK_CDR_CTRL2)
Note: The errors that cause SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode (VCC1_UV, WD_FAIL, VCC1_SC, TSD2_SAFE, 
TSD2, FAILURE) are the exceptions of an INTN generation on status bits. Also the bits POR and 
DEV_STAT_[1:0] will not generate interrupts.
Note: During SBC Restart Mode the SPI is blocked and the microcontroller is in reset. Therefore the INTN is 
not activated in SBC Restart Mode, which is the same behavior in SBC-Fail-Safe or Sleep Mode.
Interrupt logic
INT
Time 
out
V
cc1

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Interrupt Function

Data Sheet 91 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

In addition to this behavior, INTN is triggered when SBC Stop Mode is entered and not all wake source bits

were cleared in the WK_STAT_0and WK_STAT_1 register.

The SPI status registers are updated at every falling edge of the INTN pulse. All interrupt events are stored in

the respective register (except the register WK_LVL_STAT) until the register is read and cleared via SPI

command. A second SPI read after reading out the respective status register is optional but recommended to

verify that the interrupt event is not present anymore. The interrupt behavior is shown in Figure 34 for class 1

interrupts. The behavior for class 2 is identical.

The INTN pin is also used during SBC Init Mode to select the hardware configuration of the device. See

Chapter 5.1.1 for further information.

Figure 34 Interrupt Signalization Behavior

INTN

WK CAN

INT

INTD

Update of

WK_STAT register

SPI

Read & Clear

Update of

WK_STAT register

WK_STAT

contents

Scenario 1

WK no WK CAN no WK

optional

SPI

Read & Clear

WK_STAT

contents

Scenario 2

WK + CAN no WK

No SPI Read & Clear

Command sent

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Interrupt Function
 
Data Sheet 92 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
10.2 Electrical Characteristics
Table 29 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current
defined flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
Interrupt Output; Pin INTN
INTN High Output Voltage VINTN,H 0.8 × 
VCC1
––V
1)IINTN = -1 mA;
INTN = Off
1) Output Voltage Value also determines device configuration during SBC Init Mode
P_11.2.1
INTN Low Output Voltage VINTN,L – – 0.2 × 
VCC1
V1)IINTN = 1 mA;
INTN = On
P_11.2.2
INTN Pulse Width tINTN 80 100 120 µs 2)
2) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.
P_11.2.3
INTN Pulse Minimum 
Delay Time
tINTND 80 100 120 µs 2) between 
consecutive pulses
P_11.2.4
Configuration Select; Pin INTN
Config Pull-down 
Resistance
RCFG 150 250 320 kΩVINTN = 5 V P_11.2.5
Config Select Filter Time tCFG_F 51014µs
2) P_11.2.6

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)

Data Sheet 93 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

11 Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)

11.1 Block and Functional Description

Figure 35 Simplified Fail Output and GPIO Block Diagram

Features

• Fail-Output Function to signalize fail-safe events (FO function)

• General Purpose I/O functionality in case the fail-output function is not needed (GPIO function)

• Output of HV Measurement function in case WK/SENSE is selected accordingly (WK_MEAS)

Failure Logic

GPIO

Config / Control

Logic

FO/GPIO

5V _int

PU _ GPIO

PD _GPIO

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)
 
Data Sheet 94 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
11.1.1 Fail-Output Function
The fail output consists of a failure logic and an open-drain output (FO) with active-low signalization. It is the
default configuration after device power-up to support fail-safe functions.
The fail output is activated due to following failure conditions:
• Watchdog trigger failure (For config 3&4 only after the 2nd watchdog trigger failure and for config 1&2 after 
1st watchdog trigger failure)
• Thermal shutdown TSD2
• VCC1 short to GND
• VCC1 over voltage (only if the SPI bit VCC1_OV_RST is set)
If FO is triggered, the SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered (exceptions are watchdog trigger failures depending on
selected configurations - see Chapter 5.1.1). The fail output activation is signalled in the SPI bit FAILURE of the
register DEV_STAT.
The entry of SBC Fail-Safe Mode due to a watchdog failure can be configured as described in Chapter 5.1.1.
If the FO was activated due to a failure then it stays activated (pulled Low) in all SBC Modes.
In order to deactivate the fail output in SBC Normal Mode the failure conditions must not be present anymore
(e.g. TSD2, VCC1 short circuit, VCC1 over voltage - independent of the VCC1_OV_RST, etc) and the bit FAILURE
must be cleared via SPI command. In case of a FAILURE bit is set due to a watchdog fail, a successful WD trigger
is needed in addition, i.e. WD_FAIL must be cleared. WD_FAIL is also cleared when going to SBC Sleep or SBC
Fail-Safe Mode due to another failure (not a WD failure) or if the watchdog is disabled in SBC Stop Mode.
For testing purposes only the Fail Output can be activated via SPI by setting the bit FO_ON. This bit is
independent of the FO failure bits. In case there is no failure condition, the FO output can also be turned Off
again via SPI, i.e. no successful watchdog trigger is needed. 
In case FO was activated via the SPI bit FO_ON it is disabled when entering SBC Restart Mode and stays Off in
SBC Normal Mode.
Note: The Fail output pin is triggered for any of the above described failures.
Note: The bit FO_ON can be written in any GPIO configuration. However, the fail-output pin FO/GPIO is only 
activated if GPIO is configured as FO, i.e. the bit is ignored for any other GPIO configuration.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)
 
Data Sheet 95 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
11.1.2 General Purpose I/O Function as Alternate Function 
In case the FO functionality is not used, the pin can be configured with an alternate function as high-voltage
(VS related) General Purpose I/O pin via the SPI bits GPIO.
To avoid unintentional changes of the respective GPIO function during operation the configuration can be
locked via the SPI bit CFG_LOCK_0
FO/GPIO can be reconfigured in SBC Normal Mode for the following functions:
• FO functionality (default state) when configured as GPIO =’000’...’010’: 
– Overcurrent shutdown and open load detection is disabled 
• Off (also disabled in case FO1 is activated) when configured as GPIO =’100’
• Wake Input when configured as GPIO=’101’:
– There is a blanking time tGPIO,WK,blank when FO/GPIO is configured as wake input. Only then the level 
detection becomes valid, i.e. the filter time tFWK1 is started.
– The pin can be used as a wake source. A level change is detected at the threshold VGPIOI,th. 
The wake capability can be enabled and disabled by setting the GPIO bits. Once configured as wake 
input it is automatically wake capable.
– wake-up events are stored and reported in WK_STAT_1; the bit GPIO_WK_WU is cleared when SBC Fail-
Safe Mode is entered.
– Internal pull-up or pull-down structures are implemented and can be configured with the SPI bits 
GPIO_WK_PUPD.
– SBC Normal, Stop-, Init and Restart Mode: The input level is shown in the WK_LVL_STAT register 
– SBC Normal and Stop Mode: INTN is triggered in case of a qualified edge change.
– SBC Restart Mode: The SPI is blocked and cannot be read; 
INTN is not triggered but GPIO_WK_WU is set.
– SBC Sleep Mode: The device is woken in case of a qualified edge change, i.e. VCC1 is enabled. 
WK_LVL_STAT is updated during SBC Sleep and Fail-Safe Mode but it can only be read when entering 
SBC Normal Mode again.
• Low-Side incl. PWM control when configured as GPIO =’110’:
– The switch is controlled by the PWM generator: 0% DC = Off and 100% DC = On; 
any other duty cycle can be configured in PWM_CTRL. 
The PWM frequency can be selected in PWM_FREQ_CTRL
– The respective level at the pin is shown in WK_LVL_STAT in SBC Normal, Stop-, Init and Restart Mode 
and can serve as a feedback about the respective switch state1)
– On-state overcurrent shutdown is implemented. 
In PWM operation the diagnosis is active only during the LS On-time. 
The bit GPIO_OC shows an over current shutdown respectively and the switch is disabled. 
Depending on the duty cycle the diagnosis might not be activated considering the respective filter 
timing. 
• High-Side incl. PWM control when configured as GPIO =’111’:
1) The level is determined by the wake comparator and is shown as Low or High, i.e. the feature might not be useful if a duty cycle of 
0% < DC < 100% is applied

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)
 
Data Sheet 96 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
– The switch is controlled by the PWM generator: 0% DC = Off and 100% DC = On; 
any other duty cycle can be configured in PWM_CTRL.
The PWM frequency can be selected in PWM_FREQ_CTRL
– The respective level at the pin is shown in WK_LVL_STAT in SBC Normal, Stop-, Init and Restart Mode 
and can serve as a feedback about the respective switch state1)
– On-state open load detection and overcurrent shutdown is implemented. 
During PWM operation the diagnosis is active only during the HS On-time. 
In case of open load detection the bit GPIO_OL is set. 
In case of over current detection the bit GPIO_OC is set and the switch is shut down. 
Depending on the duty cycle the diagnosis might not be activated considering the respective filter time
• High-Side with Cyclic Sense functionality when configured as GPIO = ‘011’:
– The HS is used in combination with the WK pin and is controlled by the Timer. Cyclic Sense does not 
work if the GPIO is not configured accordingly. 
– The configuration for Cyclic Sense, e.g. the period and On-time of the Cyclic Sense function is done via 
the registers TIMER_CTRL, WK_CTRL_1, WK_PUPD_CTRL 
– A learning cycle is always started if the timer is started via the On-time and GPIO is configured as HS 
with Cyclic Sense = ‘011’
– Overcurrent shutdown is active only during the HS On-time: 
In case of over current detection the bit GPIO_OC is set and the switch is shut down. 
The timer keeps running, i.e. Cyclic Wake is still available.
The open load detection is not available in this configuration.
–WK_LVL_STAT is not updated
–See Chapter 5.2.1 and Chapter 9.2 for more information about Cyclic Sense
Note: It must be ensured that the correct GPIO configuration is selected after device power-up to ensure 
proper functionality. 
It is recommended to use the CFG_LOCK_0 bit to avoid unintentional configuration changes. 
It is not recommended to change the GPIO configuration during the operation to avoid misleading 
SPI status bit settings (e.g. wake-up event, over current, open load ) or unexpected timings due to 
shared PWM generator.
Note: Before GPIO is be configured as HS or LS with PWM Control the PWM_CTRL register must be set . 
Note: The internally stored default value used for the wake-input configuration is ‘Low’. A level change is 
signalized via the bit GPIO_WK_WU in case the externally connected signal on FO/GPIO is ‘High’. If 
there is a level change at the FO/GPIO pin while configuring the wake function then a wake-up event 
can occur as there is no internal learning cycle and the last filtered value is used as a reference.
Shutdown behavior in case of low-side or high-side configuration (incl. Cyclic Sense & PWM): 
• The switch is disabled in case of over current detection with low- or high-side configuration, SBC Restart 
or Fail-Safe Mode entry
• The SPI bits are set to GPIO = Off = ‘100’
• The switch stays Off until it is enabled again via the GPIO bits, 
•In case CFG_LOCK_0 is set, then the bit must first be cleared before the configuration can be enabled again. 
Then the lock bit should be set again
• The switch can be enabled even if GPIO_OL or GPIO_OC bit is set.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)

Data Sheet 97 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

•A VS_UV condition is not affecting the behavior of the GPIO.

Note: After a short-circuit event for either low-side or high-side configuration a minimum recovery time of

25us must be ensured before enabling the respective function again!

Note: If FO is not enabled then FO/GPIO is also not activated in case of failures. Also the FAILURE bit is set

but it can be cleared. In addition, it is not possible to activate FO/GPIO via FO_ON in this case.

Restart and Soft-Reset Behavior:

The behavior during SBC Restart and Fail-Safe Mode as well as the transition to SBC Normal Mode is as follows:

• if configured as Wake Input: it will stay wake capable during SBC Restart Mode and is an automatic wake

source in SBC Fail-Safe Mode. WK_LVL_STAT is updated but it can only be read when entering again SBC

Normal Mode.

• if configured as Low-Side or High-Side: The switch is disabled during SBC Restart and Fail-Safe Mode. They

stay Off when returning to SBC Normal Mode and can be enabled again via SPI (Restart value is ‘Off’).

• if configured as FO and activated due to a failure: FO stays activated during SBC Restart Mode and when

entering SBC Normal Mode (SPI register is not modified).

• In case of a SBC Soft Reset command the GPIO configuration remains unchanged if CFG_LOCK_0 is set but

the settings for Timer and PWM register are reset.

The detailed behavior for the respective configurations and SBC modes is listed in below table:

Note: Above mentioned behavior also applies to the PWM operation for LS and HS and for HS Cyclic Sense

function.

Explanation of GPIO states:

• configurable: settings can be changed in this SBC mode

• fixed: settings stay as configured in SBC Normal Mode

• active: FO is activated due to a failure leading to SBC Restart or Fail-Safe Mode.

Table 30 Fail-Output and GPIO configuration behavior during the respective SBC Modes

Configuration

SBC Normal

Mode

SBC Stop Mode SBC Sleep Mode SBC Restart

Mode

SBC Fail-Safe Mode

FO (default)

configurable

fixed fixed active / fixed active

Off Off Off Off Off

Wake Input wake capable wake capable wake capable wake capable

Low-Side fixed fixed Off Off

High-Side fixed fixed Off Off

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)
 
Data Sheet 98 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
11.1.3 WK and FO/GPIO HV-Sensing Function as Alternative Function
This function provides the possibility to measure a voltage, e.g. the unbuffered battery voltage, with the
protected WK HV-input. The measured voltage is routed out at FO/GPIO.
If this function is enabled with the WK_MEAS then neither the FO (including the FO test via FO_ON) nor the
GPIO functionality is available. Trying to enable the FO/GPIO functionality sets the SPI_FAIL flag.
If the measurement function is enabled the following items must be noted:
• The internal pull-up / pull-down structures are disabled and the internal WK signal is gated (blocked)
•The register WK_PUPD_CTRL can be modified but functionality changes are ignored. The GPIO_CTRL 
cannot be modified while WK_MEAS = ‘1’. WK_MEAS cannot be set if FO is configured. In this case SPI_FAIL 
is set. 
FO must be set to Off first.
• The wake capability and voltage monitoring of the WK pin is disabled, i.e. WK_STAT_1 and WK_LVL_STAT 
are not updated
• If GPIO WK is the only valid wake source then the SPI_FAIL flag is set when trying to enter SBC Sleep Mode 
(see also Chapter 5.1) and SBC Restart Mode is entered
Please refer to Chapter 5.4 for more details on the functionality of the measurement unit.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)
 
Data Sheet 99 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
11.2 Electrical Characteristics
Table 31 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current
defined flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
FO and Alternative Function GPIO
FO Low-Side output 
voltage (active)
VFO,L1 – – 1 V If configured as Fail-
Output;
IFO = 4.0mA
P_12.2.1
GPIO Low-Side output 
voltage (active)
VGPIOL,L1 – – 1 V If configured as Low-
Side Switch
IGPIO = 30mA
P_12.2.3
GPIO Low-Side output 
voltage (active)
VGPIOL,L2 –– 5mV
1)If configured as 
Low-Side Switch;
IGPIO = 100µA
P_12.2.4
GPIO High-Side output 
voltage (active)
VGPIOH,H1 VS-1 – – V If configured as High-
Side Switch;
IGPO = -30mA
P_12.2.5
GPIO High-Side output 
voltage (active)
VGPIOH,H2 VS-5 – – mV 1)If configured as 
High-Side Switch;
IGPO = -100µA
P_12.2.6
GPIO input threshold 
voltage (WK config)
VGPIOI,th 1.5 2.5 3.5 V hysteresis included; 
pull-up / pull-down 
sources disabled
P_12.2.7
GPIO input threshold 
hysteresis (WK config)
VGPIOI,hys 0.6 0.9 1.3 V 1) pull-up / pull-down 
sources disabled
P_12.2.8
GPIO input filter time 
(WK config)
tF_GPIO_WK 13 16 20 µs 2) P_12.2.19
FO/GPIO input leakage 
current (all inactive)
IGPIO,LK -2 – 2 µA 0V < VGPIO < VS P_12.2.9
GPIO wake input 
activation blanking 
time
tGPIO,WK,blank 24 30 40 µs 2)after enabling as 
wake input
P_12.2.10
GPIO LS overcurrent 
Shutdown Threshold
IGPIOL,SD 30 – 65 mA VGPIO = VS, hysteresis 
included
P_12.2.11
GPIO HS overcurrent 
Shutdown Threshold
IGPIOH,SD -65 – -30 mA VGPIO = 0V, hysteresis 
included
P_12.2.12
GPIO overcurrent 
shutdown filter time 
tGPIO,OC 20 26 32 µs 2)applies for HS and 
LS configuration
P_12.2.13
GPIO HS open load 
detection
IGPIOH,OL -3.0 – -0.5 mA in On-state, 
hysteresis included
P_12.2.15

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Fail Output (FO) and General Purpose I/O (GPIO)

Data Sheet 100 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

GPIO open load

detection filter time

tGPIO,OL 51 64 80 µs 2) P_12.2.16

GPIO WK pin Pull-up

Current

IPU_GPIO,WK -20 -10 -3 µA VGPIO,WK_IN = 3.5V P_12.3.17

GPIO WK pin Pull-down

Current

IPD_GPIO,WK 31020µAVGPIO,WK_IN = 1.5V P_12.3.18

1) Not subject to production test, specified by design.

2) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance

Table 31 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)

VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current

defined flowing into pin

(unless otherwise specified)

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 101 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

12 Supervision Functions

12.1 Reset Function

Figure 36 Reset Block Diagram

12.1.1 Reset Output Description

The reset output pin RSTN provides a reset information to the microcontroller, e.g. in the event that the output

voltage has fallen below the undervoltage threshold VRT1/2/3/4. In case of a reset event, the reset output RSTN

is pulled to Low after the filter time tRF and stays Low as long as the reset event is present and the configurable

reset delay time has not expired. The reset delay time can be configured. The default value is the extended

reset delay time tRD1 and the reduced reset delay time tRD2 can be selected by setting RSTN_DEL. When

connecting the SBC to battery voltage, the reset signal remains Low initially. When the output voltage Vcc1 has

reached the reset default threshold VRT1,r, the reset output RSTN is released to High after the reset delay time

tRD1. A reset can also occur due to a watchdog trigger failure. The reset threshold can be adjusted via SPI, the

default reset threshold is VRT1,f. The RSTN pin has an integrated pull-up resistor. In case reset is triggered, it is

pulled Low for Vcc1 ≥ 1V and for VS ≥ VPOR,f (see also Chapter 12.3).

The timings for the RSTN triggering regarding VCC1 undervoltage and watchdog trigger is shown in Figure 37.

Reset logic

Incl. filter & delay

RSTN

VCC1

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 102 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 37 Reset Timing Diagram

12.1.2 Soft Reset Description

In SBC Normal and SBC Stop Mode, it is also possible to trigger a device internal reset via a SPI command in

order to bring the SBC into a defined state in case of failures. In this case the microcontroller must send a SPI

command and set the MODE bits to ‘11’ in the M_S_CTRL register. As soon as this command becomes valid,

the SBC is set back to SBC INIT Mode and all SPI registers are set to their default values (see SPI Chapter 13.5

and Chapter 13.6).

Two different soft reset configurations are possible via the SPI bit SOFT_RESET_RST:

•SOFT_RESET_RST = ‘0’: The reset output (RSTN) is triggered when the soft reset is executed (default

setting, the same reset delay time tRD1 applies)

•SOFT_RESET_RST = ‘1’: The reset output (RSTN) is not triggered when the soft reset is executed

Note: The device must be in SBC Normal Mode or SBC Stop Mode when sending this command.

Otherwise, the command is ignored.

The reset threshold can be

configured via SPI in SBC

Normal Mode , default is VRT1

tRD1 tLW

SBC Init

RSTN

SPI

VCC1

VRT1

undervoltage

tRDx

SBC Normal

tLW

t < tRF

tRF

tCW

SBC Restart SBC Normal

SPI

Init

tCW tOW

Trigger

tCW tOW

Trigger

SPI

Init

tLW= long open window

tCW= closed window

tOW= open window

tRD 1 is the default value at

device power up . The reset

delay time tRDx can be

selected via SPI

VRT1 is the default value at

device power up . The

thresholds V RTx can be

selected via SPI

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 103 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

12.2 Watchdog Function

The watchdog is used to monitor the software execution of the microcontroller and to trigger a reset if the

microcontroller stops serving the watchdog due to a lock up in the software.

Two different types of watchdog functions are implemented and can be selected via the bit WD_WIN:

• Time-Out Watchdog (default value)

•Window Watchdog

The respective watchdog functions can be selected and programmed in SBC Normal Mode. The configuration

stays unchanged in SBC Stop Mode.

Please refer to Table 32 to match the SBC Modes with the respective watchdog modes.

The watchdog timing is programmed via SPI command in the register WD_CTRL. As soon as the watchdog is

programmed, the timer starts with the new setting and the watchdog must be served. The watchdog is

triggered by sending a valid SPI-write command to the watchdog configuration register. The watchdog trigger

command is executed when the SPI command is interpreted, i.e. 3 clock cycles (typ. 3µs) after the transition

of Chip Select input (CSN) from Low to High.

When coming from SBC Init, SBC Restart Mode or in certain cases from SBC Stop Mode, the watchdog timer is

always started with a long open window. The long open window (tLW = 200ms) allows the microcontroller to

run its initialization sequences and then to trigger the watchdog via SPI.

The watchdog timer period can be selected via the watchdog timing bit field (WD_TIMER) and is in the range

of 10 ms to 10000 ms. This setting is valid for both watchdog types.

The following watchdog timer periods are available:

• WD Setting 1: 10ms

• WD Setting 2: 20ms

• WD Setting 3: 50ms

• WD Setting 4: 100ms

• WD Setting 5: 200ms

• WD Setting 6: 500ms

• WD Setting 7: 1000ms

• WD Setting 8: 10000ms

In case of a watchdog reset, SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered according to the configuration and

the SPI bits WD_FAIL are set. Once the RSTN goes High again the watchdog immediately starts with a long

open window the SBC enters automatically SBC Normal Mode.

Table 32 Watchdog Functionality by SBC Modes

SBC Mode Watchdog Mode Remarks

INIT Mode Starts with Long Open

Window

Watchdog starts with Long Open Window after RSTN

is released

Normal Mode WD Programmable Window Watchdog, Time-Out watchdog or switched

Off for SBC Stop Mode

Stop Mode Watchdog is fixed or Off

Sleep Mode Off SBC starts with Long Open Window when entering

SBC Normal Mode.

Restart Mode Off SBC starts with Long Open Window when entering

SBC Normal Mode.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 104 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

In SBC Development Mode the watchdog is Off and therefore no reset is generated due to a watchdog failure.

Depending on the configuration, the WD_FAIL bits are set after a watchdog trigger failure as follows:

• In case an incorrect WD trigger is received (triggering in the closed watchdog window or when the

watchdog counter expires without a valid trigger) then the WD_FAIL bits are incremented (showing the

number of incorrect WD triggers)

• For config 2: the bits can have the maximum value of ‘01’

• For config 1, 3 and 4: the bits can have the maximum value of ‘10’

The WD_FAIL bits are cleared automatically if following conditions apply:

• After a successful watchdog trigger

• When the watchdog is Off: in SBC Stop Mode after successfully disabling the watchdog, in SBC Sleep Mode,

or in SBC Fail-Safe Mode (except for a watchdog failure)

12.2.1 Time-Out Watchdog

The time-out watchdog is an easier but less secure watchdog than a window watchdog because the watchdog

trigger can be set at any time within the configured watchdog timer period.

A correct watchdog service immediately results in starting a new watchdog timer period. Taking the

tolerances of the internal oscillator into account the safe trigger area is defined in Figure 38.

If the time-out watchdog period elapses, a watchdog reset is created by setting the reset output RSTN Low and

the SBC switches to SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode.

Figure 38 Time-out Watchdog Definitions

12.2.2 Window Watchdog

Compared to the time-out watchdog the characteristic of the window watchdog is that the watchdog timer

period is divided into a closed and an open window. The watchdog must be triggered within the open window.

A correct watchdog trigger results in starting the window watchdog period with a closed window followed by

an open window.

open window

t /

WD_TIMER

]

safe trigger area

Wd1_TimeOut_per. vsd

Watchdog Timer Period (WD_TIMER)

uncertainty

Typical timout watchdog trigger period

x 1.80

x 1.20

x 1.50

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 105 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

The watchdog timer period is also the typical trigger time and defines the middle of the open window. Taking

the oscillator tolerances into account leads to a safe trigger area of:

tWD x 0.72 < safe trigger area < tWD x 1.20.

The typical closed window is defined to a width of 60% of the selected window watchdog timer period. Taking

the tolerances of the internal oscillator into account leads to the timings as defined in Figure 39.

A correct watchdog service immediately results in starting the next closed window.

If the trigger signal meets the closed window or the watchdog timer period elapses, then a watchdog reset is

created by setting the reset output RSTN Low and the SBC switches to SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode.

Figure 39 Window Watchdog Definitions

12.2.3 Watchdog Setting Check Sum

A check sum bit is part of the SPI command to trigger the watchdog and to set the watchdog setting.

The sum of the 8 data bits in the register WD_CTRL needs to have even parity (see Equation (12.1)). This is

realized by either setting the bit CHECKSUM to 0 or 1. If the check sum is wrong, then the SPI command is

ignored, i.e. the watchdog is not triggered or the settings are not changed and the bit SPI_FAIL is set.

The checksum is calculated by taking all 8 data bits into account. The written value of the reserved bit 3 of the

WD_CTRL register is considered (even if read as ‘0’ in the SPI output) for checksum calculation, i.e. if a ‘1’ is

written on the reserved bit position, then a ‘1’ is used in the checksum calculation.

(12.1)

12.2.4 Watchdog during SBC Stop Mode

The watchdog can be disabled for SBC Stop Mode in SBC Normal Mode. For safety reasons a special sequence

must be followed in order to disable the watchdog as described in Figure 40. Two different SPI bits (WD_STM_

EN_0, WD_STM_ EN_1) in the registers WK_CTRL_0 and WD_CTRL need to be set.

closed window open window

t /

WD_TIMER

]

safe trigger area

tWD x 0.72 tWD x 1.20

uncertainty uncertainty

tWD x 0.48 tWD x 1.80

Watchdog Timer Period (WD_TIMER)

Typ. closed window Typ. open window

tWD x 0.6

tWD x 1.0

tWD x 0.9

CHKSUM Bit15 …Bit8⊕⊕=

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 106 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 40 Watchdog disabling sequence in SBC Stop Mode

If a sequence error occurs, then the bit WD_STM_ EN_1 is cleared and the sequence has to be started again.

The watchdog can be enabled by triggering the watchdog in SBC Stop Mode or by switching back to SBC

Normal Mode via SPI command. In both cases the watchdog starts with a long open window and the bits

WD_STM_EN_1 and WD_STM_ EN_0 are cleared. After the long open window the watchdog has to be served

as configured in the WD_CTRL register.

Note: The bit WD_STM_ EN_0 is cleared automatically when the sequence is started and it was ‘1’ before.

WD_STM_ EN_0 can also not be set if WD_STM_ EN_1 isn't yet set.

12.2.5 Watchdog Start in SBC Stop Mode due to Bus Wake

In SBC Stop Mode the Watchdog can be disabled. In addition a feature is available that starts the watchdog

with any Bus wake (CAN) during SBC Stop Mode. This feature is enabled by setting the bit WD_EN_ WK_BUS = 1

(= default value after POR). The bit can only be changed in SBC Normal Mode and needs to be programmed

before starting the watchdog disabling sequence.

A wake on CAN generates an interrupt and the RXD pin for CAN is pulled to Low. By these signals the

microcontroller is informed that the watchdog is startedwith a long open window. After the long open window

the watchdog has to be served as configured in the WD_CTRL register.

To disable the watchdog again, the SBC has to be switched to Normal Mode and the sequence has to be sent

again.

Correct WD disabling

sequence

Set bit

WD_STM_EN_1 = 1

Set bit

WD_STM_EN_0 = 1

with next WD Trigger

WD is switched off

Sequence Errors

•Missing to set bit

WD_STM_EN_0 with the

next watchdog trigger after

having set WD_STM_EN_1

•Staying in Normal Mode

instead of going to Stop

Mode with the next trigger

Change to

SBC Stop Mode

Before subsequent WD Trigger

Will enable the WD :

•Switching back to SBC

Normal Mode

•Triggering the watchdog

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 107 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

12.3 VS Power-On Reset

At power up of the device, the VS Power-on Reset is detected when VS > VPOR,r and the SPI bit POR is set to

indicate that all SPI registers are set to POR default settings. VCC1 is starting up and the reset output RSTN is

kept Low. It will only be released once VCC1 has crossed VRT1,r and tRD1 has elapsed.

In case VS < VPOR,f, a device internal reset is generated and the SBC is switched Off and restarts in INIT mode

with the next VS rising. This is shown in Figure 41.

Figure 41 Ramp up / down example of Supply Voltage

VCC1

POR,f

RSTN

POR,r

RD1

RT1,r

RTx,f

SBC Mode

SBC OFF SBC OFFSBC INIT MODE Any SBC MODE

SPI

Command

The reset threshold can be

configured via SPI in SBC

Normal Mode , default is V

RT1

Re-

start

SBC Restart Mode is

entered whenever the

Reset is triggered

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Supervision Functions
 
Data Sheet 108 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
12.4 VS Under- and Overvoltage 
12.4.1 VS Undervoltage
The VS under-voltage monitoring is always active in SBC Init-, Restart- and Normal Mode (see below
conditions for SBC Stop Mode). If the supply voltage VS reaches the undervoltage threshold VS,UV then the SBC
triggers the following actions:
•SPI bit VS_UV is set. No other error bits are set. The bit can be cleared once the VS undervoltage condition 
is not present anymore
• The VCC1 short circuit protection becomes inactive (see Chapter 12.6). However, the thermal protection of 
the device remains active. If the undervoltage threshold is exceeded (VS rising) then the function is 
automatically enabled again
Note:  VS under-voltage monitoring is not available in SBC Stop Mode due to current consumption saving 
requirements except if the VCC1 load current is above the active peak threshold (I_PEAK_TH) or if 
VCC1 is below the VCC1 prewarning threshold.
12.4.2 VS Overvoltage
The VS over-voltage monitoring is always active SBC Init-, Restart- and Normal Mode (see below note for
conditions in SBC Stop Mode) or when the charge pump is enabled. If the supply voltage VS reaches the over-
voltage threshold VS,OV then the SBC does the following measures:
•SPI bit VS_OV is set. This bit is intended for diagnosis only, i.e. or other error bits are set. The bit can be 
cleared once the VS over-voltage condition is not present anymore
If the charge pump is disabled after the bit VS,OV was set then the bit will stay set until it is cleared via SPI.
Note:  VS over-voltage monitoring is not available in SBC Stop Mode due to current consumption saving 
requirements except if the VCC1 load current is above the active peak threshold (I_PEAK_TH) or if 
VCC1 is below the VCC1 prewarning threshold.
12.5 VCC1 Over-/ Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning
12.5.1 VCC1 Undervoltage and Undervoltage Prewarning
This function is always active when the VCC1 voltage regulator is enabled. 
A first-level voltage detection threshold is implemented as a prewarning for the microcontroller. The
prewarning event is signaled with the bit VCC1_ WARN. No other actions are taken.
As described in Chapter 12.1 and Figure 42, a reset is triggered (RSTN pulled Low) when the VCC1 output voltage
falls below the selected undervoltage threshold (VRTx). The SBC enters SBC Restart Mode and the bit VCC1_UV
is set when RSTN is released again. 
The hysteresis of the VCC1 undervoltage threshold can be increased by setting the bit RSTN_HYS. In this case
always the highest rising threshold (Vrt1,r) is used for the release of the undervoltage reset. The falling reset
threshold remains as configured.
Note: The VCC1_ WARN or VCC1_UV bits are not set in Sleep Mode as VCC1 = 0V in this case

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Supervision Functions
 
Data Sheet 109 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Figure 42  VCC1 Undervoltage Timing Diagram
Note: It is recommended to clear the VCC1_ WARN and VCC1_UV bit once it is detected by the 
microcontroller software to verify whether the undervoltage is still present.
12.5.2 VCC1 Overvoltage
For fail-safe reasons a configurable VCC1 over voltage detection feature is implemented. It is active when the
VCC1 voltage regulator is enabled. 
In case the VCC1,OV,r threshold is crossed, the SBC triggers following measures (depending on the
configuration): 
•The bit VCC1_ OV is always set;
•If the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and CFG0_STATE = ‘1’, then SBC Restart Mode is entered. The FO output is 
activated. After the reset delay time (tRD1), the SBC Restart Mode is left and SBC Normal Mode is resumed 
even if the VCC1 over voltage event is still present (see also Figure 43). The VCC1_OV_RST bit is cleared 
automatically;
•If the bit VCC1_OV_RST is set and CFG0_STATE = ‘0’, then SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered and FO output is 
activated.
Note: External noise could be coupled into the VCC1 supply line. Especially, in case the VCC1 output current 
in SBC STOP Mode is below the active peak threshold (IVCC1,Ipeak) it should be considered to clear the 
bit VCC1_OV_RST before entering SBC Stop Mode to avoid unintentional SBC Restart or Fail-Safe 
Mode entry and to ignore the VCC1_ OV bit due to external noise.
RSTN
t
VCC1
V
RTx
t
RD1
SBC Normal
t
t
RF 
SBC Restart SBC Normal

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Supervision Functions

Data Sheet 110 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 43 VCC1 Over Voltage Timing Diagram

12.6 VCC1 Short Circuit Diagnostics

The short circuit protection feature for VCC1 is implemented as follows:

• The short circuit detection is only enabled if VS > VS,UV

• If VCC1 is not above the VRTx within tVCC1,SC after device power up or after waking from SBC Sleep or Fail-

Safe Mode (i.e. after VCC1 is enabled) then the SPI bit VCC1_SC bit is set, VCC1 is turned Off, the FO pin is

enabled, FAILURE is set and SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered. The SBC can be activated again via a wake-up

on CAN and WK or GPIO if configured as wake input.

• The same behavior applies, if VCC1 falls below VRTx for longer than tVCC1,SC.

12.7 VCC2 Undervoltage and VCAN Undervoltage

An undervoltage warning is implemented for VCC2 and VCAN as follows:

•VCC2 undervoltage detection: In case VCC2 is enabled and drops below the VCC2,UV,f threshold, then the SPI bit

VCC2_UV is set and can be only cleared via SPI. During power-up the blanking time tVCC2,Blank applies, i.e. no

undervoltage warning bit is set during this time.

•VCAN undervoltage detection: In case the CAN module is enabled and the voltage on VCAN drops below the

VCAN_UV,f threshold, then the SPI bit VCAN_UV is set and can be only cleared via SPI.

Note: The VCC2_UV flag is not set during turn-On or turn-Off of VCC2.

RSTN

VCC1

RD1

SBC Normal

OV_filt

SBC Restart SBC Normal

CC1,OV

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Supervision Functions
 
Data Sheet 111 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
12.8 Thermal Protection
Three independent and different thermal protection features are implemented in the SBC according to the
system impact:
• Individual thermal shutdown of specific blocks
• Temperature prewarning of main microcontroller supply VCC1
• SBC thermal shutdown due to VCC1 overtemperature
12.8.1 Individual Thermal Shutdown 
As a first-level protection measure the output stages VCC2 and CAN are independently switched Off if the
respective block reaches the temperature threshold TjTSD1_1 / TjTSD1_2. Then the TSD1 bit is set. This bit can only
be cleared via SPI once the overtemperature is not present anymore. Independent of the SBC Mode the
thermal shutdown protection is only active if the respective block is On.
The respective modules behave as follows:
• VCC2: Is switched to Off and the control bits VCC2_ON are cleared. The status bit VCC2_OT is set. Once the 
overtemperature condition is not present anymore, then VCC2 has to be configured again by SPI. 
• CAN: The transmitter is disabled and stays in CAN Normal Mode acting like CAN Receive only mode. The 
status bits CAN_FAIL = ‘01’ are set. Once the overtemperature condition is not present anymore, then the 
CAN transmitter is automatically switched On.
Note: The diagnosis bits are not cleared automatically and have to be cleared via SPI once the 
overtemperature condition is not present anymore.
12.8.2 Temperature Prewarning
As a next level of thermal protection a temperature prewarning is implemented. If the main supply VCC1
exceeds the thermal prewarning temperature threshold TjPW. Then the status bit TPW is set. This bit can only
be cleared via SPI once the overtemperature is not present anymore.
12.8.3 SBC Thermal Shutdown
As the highest level of thermal protection a temperature shutdown of the SBC is implemented if the main
supply VCC1 reaches the thermal shutdown temperature threshold TjTSD1_1 / TjTSD1_2. Once a TSD2 event is
detected SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered. Only when device temperature falls below the TSD2 threshold then
the device remains in SBC Fail-Safe Mode for tTSD2 to allow the device to cool down. After this time has expired,
the SBC automatically changes via SBC Restart Mode to SBC Normal Mode (see also Chapter 5.1.6).
When a TSD2 event is detected, then the status bit TSD2 is set. This bit can only be cleared via SPI in SBC
Normal Mode once the overtemperature is not present anymore.
For increased robustness it is possible to extend the TSD2 waiting time by 64x of tTSD2 after 16 consecutive
TSD2 events by setting the SPI bit TSD2_DEL. The counter is incremented with each TSD2 event even if the bit
TSD2 is not cleared. Once the counter has reached the value 16, then the bit TSD2_SAFE is set and the
extended TSD2 waiting time is active. The extended waiting time is kept until TSD2_SAFE is cleared. The TSD
counter is cleared when TSD2 or TSD2_DEL is cleared.
Note: In case a TSD2 overtemperature occurs while entering SBC Sleep Mode then SBC Fail-Safe mode is 
entered.
Note: To enable higher ambient temperatures the thermal shutdown thresholds can be increased by 10K 
for TSD1 and TSD2 by setting the bit TSD_THR.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Supervision Functions
 
Data Sheet 112 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
12.9 Electrical Characteristics
Table 33 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current
defined flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
VCC1 Monitoring; 
Undervoltage Prewarning 
Threshold Voltage PW,f
VPW,f 4.53 4.70 4.84 V VCC1 falling, 
SPI bit is set
P_13.9.1
Undervoltage Prewarning 
Threshold Voltage PW,r
VPW,r 4.60 4.75 4.90 V VCC1 rising P_13.9.2
Undervoltage Prewarning 
Threshold Voltage 
hysteresis
VPW,hys 30 50 90 mV 5) P_13.9.3
VCC1 UV Prewarning 
Detection Filter Time
tVCC1,PW_F 51014us
3) rising and falling P_13.9.4
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT1,f
VRT1,f 4.45 4.6 4.75 V default setting; 
VCC1 falling
P_13.9.5
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT1,r
VRT1,r 4.58 4.74 4.90 V default setting; 
VCC1 rising
P_13.9.6
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT2,f
VRT2,f 3.70 3.85 4.00 V VCC1 falling P_13.9.7
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT2,r
VRT2,r 3.85 4.0 4.15 V VCC1 rising P_13.9.8
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT3,f
VRT3,f 3.24 3.40 3.55 V VS ≥ 4V;
VCC1 falling
P_13.9.9
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT3,r
VRT3,r 3.39 3.54 3.70 V  VS ≥ 4V;
VCC1 rising
P_13.9.10
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT4,f
VRT4,f 2.49 2.65 2.8 V  VS ≥ 4V; 
VCC1 falling
P_13.9.11
Reset Threshold 
Voltage RT4,r
VRT4,r 2.65 2.76 2.95 V  VS ≥ 4V; 
VCC1 rising
P_13.9.12
Reset Threshold Hysteresis VRT,hys 70 140 220 mV 5) P_13.9.13
VCC1 Over Voltage Detection 
Threshold Voltage
VCC1,OV,r 5.6 5.8 6.0 V 1)5)rising VCC1 P_13.9.26
VCC1 Over Voltage Detection 
Threshold Voltage
VCC1,OV,f 5.48 5.65 5.82 V 5)falling VCC1 P_13.9.27
VCC1 Over Voltage Detection 
hysteresis
VCC1,OV,hys 50 160 200 mV 5) P_13.9.30
VCC1 OV Detection Filter 
Time
tVCC1,OV_F 51 64 80 us 3) P_13.9.31

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Supervision Functions
 
Data Sheet 113 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
VCC1 Short to GND Filter 
Time
tVCC1,SC 1.6 2 2.4 ms 3)blanking time 
during power-up, 
short circuit 
detection for VS ≥ 
VS,UV
P_13.9.32
Reset Generator; Pin RSTN
Reset Low Output Voltage VRSTN,L –0.20.4VIRSTN = 1 mA for
VCC1 ≥ 1 V & 
VS≥VPOR,f 
P_13.9.33
Reset High Output Voltage VRSTN,H 0.8 x 
VCC1
–VCC1 + 
0.3 V
VIRSTN = -20 µA P_13.9.34
Reset Pull-up Resistor RRSTN 10 20 40 kΩVRSTN = 0 V P_13.9.35
Reset Filter Time tRF 41026µs
3)VCC1 < VRT1x
to RSTN = L see 
also Chapter 12.3
P_13.9.36
Reset Delay Time (long) tRD1 81012ms
2) 3)RSTN_DEL = ‘0’ 
(default value)
P_13.9.37
Reset Delay Time (reduced) tRD2 1.6 2 2.4 ms 2) 3)RSTN_DEL = ‘1’ P_13.9.70
VCC2 Monitoring
VCC2 Undervoltage 
Threshold Voltage (falling)
VCC2,UV,f 4.5 – 4.75 V VCC2 falling P_13.9.38
VCC2 Undervoltage 
Threshold Voltage (rising)
VCC2,UV,r 4.6 – 4.85 V VCC2 rising P_13.9.39
VCC2 Undervoltage detection 
hysteresis
VCC2,UV, hys 70 150 250 mV 5) P_13.9.40
VCC2 Undervoltage 
Detection Filter Time
tVCC2,UV_F 51014us
3) rising and falling P_13.9.41
VCC2 UV Blanking Time tVCC2,Blank 3.2 4 4.8 ms 3) after switching 
On
P_13.9.42
VCAN Monitoring
CAN Supply undervoltage 
detection threshold (falling)
VCAN_UV,f 4.5 – 4.75 V VCAN falling P_13.9.43
CAN Supply undervoltage 
detection threshold (rising)
VCAN_UV,r 4.6 – 4.85 V VCAN rising P_13.9.44
VCAN Undervoltage detection 
hysteresis
VCAN,UV, hys 70 150 250 mV 5) P_13.9.45
VCAN UV detection Filter 
Time
tVCAN,UV_F 4.2 10 14 µs 3) VCAN rising and 
falling
P_13.9.46
Table 33 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current
defined flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Supervision Functions
 
Data Sheet 114 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Watchdog Generator / Internal Oscillator
Long Open Window tLW 160 200 240 ms 3) P_13.9.47
Internal Clock Generator 
Frequency 
fCLKSBC,1 0.8 1.0 1.2 MHz – P_13.9.48
Internal Oscillator 2MHz for 
Charge Pump and SMPS 
Regulator
fCLKSBC,2 1.8 2.0 2.2 MHz 2MHZ_FREQ 
=’001’;
P_13.9.65
Minimum Waiting time during SBC Fail-Safe Mode
Min. waiting time Fail-Safe tFS,min 80 100 120 ms 3)4) P_13.9.49
Power-On Reset, Over / Undervoltage Protection
VS Power-on reset rising VPOR,r –4.5VVS increasingP_13.9.50
VS Power-on reset falling VPOR,f –3VVS decreasingP_13.9.51
VS Undervoltage Detection 
Threshold 
VS,UV 5.3 – 6.0 V Supply UV 
threshold for VCC1 
SC detection; 
hysteresis 
included; includes 
rising and falling 
threshold
P_13.9.52
VS Undervoltage Detection 
Hysteresis 
VS,UV, hys 180 220 260 mV 5) P_13.9.67
VS Undervoltage Detection 
Filter Time
tVS,UV 51014us
3) rising and falling P_13.9.62
VS Over voltage Detection 
Threshold
VS,OV 22 – 25 V 5)Supply OV 
threshold; 
only SPI diagnosis 
bit is set;
includes rising and 
falling threshold
P_13.9.63
VS Overvoltage Detection 
Filter Time
tVS,OV 51014us
3) rising and falling P_13.9.64
VS Overvoltage Detection 
Hysteresis 
VS,OV, hys 0.3 – 0.55 V 5) P_13.9.69
Overtemperature Shutdown5)
Thermal Prewarning 
Temperature
TjPW 125 145 165 °C Tj rising P_13.9.54
Table 33 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current
defined flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Supervision Functions
 
Data Sheet 115 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Thermal Shutdown TSD1 TjTSD1_1 170 185 200 °C Tj rising; 
TSD_THR = 0
P_13.9.55
Thermal Shutdown TSD1 
(high temp)
TjTSD1_2 180 195 210 °C Tj rising;
TSD_THR = 1
P_13.9.60
Thermal Shutdown TSD2 TjTSD2_2 170 185 200 °C Tj rising;
TSD_THR = 0
P_13.9.56
Thermal Shutdown TSD2 
(high temp)
TjTSD2_2 180 195 210 °C Tj rising;
TSD_THR = 1
P_13.9.61
Thermal Shutdown 
hysteresis
TjTSD,hys –25–°C– P_13.9.57
TSD/TPW Filter Time tTSD_TPW_F 51014us
3)rising and falling, 
applies to all 
thermal sensors 
(TPW, TSD1, TSD2)
P_13.9.58
Deactivation time after 
thermal shutdown TSD2
tTSD2 0.8 1 1.2 s 3) P_13.9.59
1) It is ensured that the threshold VCC1,OV,r is always higher than the highest regulated VCC1 output voltage VCC1,out4. 
2) The reset delay time starts when VCC1 crosses above the selected Vrtx threshold
3) Not subject to production test, tolerance defined by internal oscillator tolerance.
4) This time applies for all failure entries except a device thermal shutdown (TSD2 has a typ. 1s waiting time tTSD2)
5) Not subject to production test, specified by design.
Table 33 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V; Tj = -40°C to +150°C; SBC Normal Mode; all voltages with respect to ground; positive current
defined flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 116 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

13 Serial Peripheral Interface

The Serial Peripheral Interface is the communication link between the SBC and the microcontroller.

The TLE9471-3ES is supporting multi-slave operation in full-duplex mode with 16-bit and 32-bit data access

(see also Figure 46).

The SPI behavior for the different SBC Modes is as follows:

• The SPI is enabled in SBC Init, Normal and Stop Mode

• The SPI is disabled in SBC Sleep, Restart and Fail-Safe Mode

13.1 SPI Block Description

The Control Input Word is read via the data input SDI, which is synchronized with the clock input CLK provided

by the microcontroller. The output word appears synchronously at the data output SDO (see Figure 44 with a

16-bit data access example).

The transmission cycle begins when the chip is selected by the input CSN (Chip Select Not), Low active. After

the CSN input returns from Low to High, the word that has been read is interpreted according to the content.

The SDO output switches to tristate status (high impedance) at this point, thereby releasing the SDO bus for

other use. The state of SDI is shifted into the input register with every falling edge on CLK. The state of SDO is

shifted out of the output register after every rising edge on CLK. The SPI of the SBC is not daisy chain capable.

Figure 44 SPI Data Transfer Timing (note the reversed order of LSB and MSB shown in this figure compared

to the register description)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 13 147 8 9 10 15

CSN high to low: SDO is enabled. Status information transferred to output shift register

CSN low to high: data from shift register is transferred to output functions

SDI: will accept data on the falling edge of CLK signal

SDO: will change state on the rising edge of CLK signal

Actual status

11 12 13 14

Actual data New data

New status

SDO

SDI

CSN

CLK

time

ERR

-0

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 117 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
13.2 Failure Signalization in the SPI Data Output
If the microcontroller sends a wrong SPI command to the SBC, the SBC ignores the information. Wrong SPI
commands are either invalid SBC mode commands or commands which are prohibited by the state machine
to avoid undesired device or system states (see below). In this case the diagnosis bit ‘SPI_FAIL’ is set and the
SPI Write command is ignored (mostly no partial interpretation). This bit can be only reset by actively clearing
it via a SPI command.
Invalid SPI commands leading to SPI_FAIL are listed below (in this case the SPI command is ignored):
• Illegal state transitions: 
- Going from SBC Stop to SBC Sleep Mode. In this case the SBC enters SBC Restart Mode; 
- Trying to go to SBC Stop or SBC Sleep Mode from SBC Init Mode. In this case SBC Normal Mode is entered
• Uneven parity in the data bit of the WD_CTRL register. In this case the watchdog trigger is ignored and/or 
the new watchdog settings are ignored respectively
• In SBC Stop Mode: attempting to change any SPI settings, e.g. changing the watchdog configuration, PWM 
settings and HS configuration settings during SBC Stop Mode, etc.; 
the SPI command is ignored in this case;
only WD trigger, returning to Normal Mode, triggering a SBC Soft Reset, and Read & Clear status registers 
commands are valid SPI commands in SBC Stop Mode;
Note: No failure handling is done for the attempt to go to SBC STOP Mode when all bits in the registers 
BUS_CTRL_0 and WK_CTRL_1 are cleared because the microcontroller can leave this mode via SPI
• When entering SBC Stop Mode and WK_STAT_0 and WK_STAT_1 are not cleared; SPI_FAIL is not set but the 
INTN pin is triggered
• Changing from SBC Stop to Normal Mode and changing the other bits of the M_S_CTRL register. The other 
modifications are ignored
• SBC Sleep Mode: attempt to go to Sleep Mode without any wake source set, i.e. when all bits in the 
BUS_CTRL_0, WK_CTRL_0, WK_CTRL_1 and GPIO_CTRL registers are cleared. In this case the SPI_FAIL bit 
is set and the device enters SBC Restart Mode.
Even though the Sleep Mode command is not entered in this case, the rest of the command (e.g. modifying 
VCC2) is executed but restart values apply during SBC Restart Mode;
Note: At least one wake source must be activated in order to avoid a deadlock situation in SBC Sleep Mode, 
i.e. the SBC would not be able to wake-up anymore. 
If the only wake source is a timer and the timer is Off then the SBC will wake-up immediately from Sleep 
Mode and enter Restart Mode;
• Trying to set WK_MEAS when FO/GPIO is not Off, i.e. FO is activated/configured or any GPIO configuration 
is selected
• Trying to change the GPIO_CTRL settings in case WK_MEAS is set
• Setting a longer or equal On-time than the timer period of the respective timer
• SDI stuck at High or Low, e.g. SDI received all ‘0’ or all ‘1’
Note: There is no SPI fail information for unused addresses.
Signalization of the ERR Flag (high active) in the SPI Data Output (see Figure 44):
The ERR flag presents an additional diagnosis possibility for the SPI communication. The ERR flag is being set
for following conditions:
• in case the number of received SPI clocks is not 0 or 16 or 32
• in case RSTN is Low and SPI frames are being sent at the same time.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 118 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: In order to read the SPI ERR flag properly, CLK must be Low when CSN is triggered, i.e. the ERR bit is

not valid if the CLK is High on a falling edge of CSN

The number of received SPI clocks is not 0, 16 or 32:

The number of received input clocks is supervised to be 0 or 16 or 32 clock cycles and the input word is

discarded in case of a mismatch (0 clock cycle to enable ERR signalization). The error logic also recognizes if

CLK was High during CSN edges. Both errors - 0 or 16 or 32 bit CLK mismatch or CLK High during CSN edges -

are flagged in the following SPI output by a “High” at the data output (SDO pin, bit ERR) before the first rising

edge of the clock is received. The complete SPI command is ignored in this case.

RSTN is Low and SPI frames are being sent at the same time:

The ERR flag is set when the RSTN pin is triggered (during SBC Restart) and SPI frames are being sent to the

SBC at the same time. The behavior of the ERR flag is signalized at the next SPI command for below conditions:

• if the command begins when RSTN is High and it ends when RSTN is Low,

• if a SPI command is sent while RSTN is Low,

• If a SPI command begins when RSTN is Low and it ends when RSTN is High.

and the SDO output behaves as follows:

• always when RSTN is Low then SDO is High,

• when a SPI command begins with RSTN is Low and ends when RSTN is High, then the SDO should be

ignored because wrong data is sent.

Note: It is possible to quickly check for the ERR flag without sending any data bits. i.e. only the CSN is pulled

Low and SDO is observed - no SPI Clocks are sent in this case

Note: The ERR flag could also be set after the SBC has entered SBC Fail-Safe Mode because the SPI

communication is stopped immediately.

13.3 SPI Programming

For the TLE9471-3ES, 7 bits are used or the address selection (BIT6...0). Bit 7 is used to decide between Read

Only and Read & Clear for the status bits, and between Write and Read Only for configuration bits. For the

actual configuration and status information, 8 data bits (BIT15...8) are used.

Writing, clearing and reading is done byte wise. The SPI status bits are not cleared automatically and must be

cleared by the microcontroller, e.g. if the TSD2 was set due to over temperature. Some of the configuration

bits will automatically be cleared by the SBC - please refer to the respective register descriptions for detailed

information. In SBC Restart Mode, the device ignores all SPI communication, i.e. it does not interpreted it.

There are two types of SPI registers:

• Control registers: These registers are used to configure the SBC, e.g. SBC mode, watchdog trigger, etc.

• Status registers: These registers indicate the status of the SBC, e.g. wake-up events, warnings, failures, etc.

For the status registers, the requested information is given in the same SPI command in the data out (SDO).

For the control registers, the status of each byte is shown in the same SPI command as well. However,

configuration changes of the same register are only shown in the next SPI command (configuration changes

inside the SBC become valid only after CSN changes from Low to High).

Writing of control registers is possible in SBC Init and Normal Mode. During SBC Stop Mode only the change to

SBC Normal Mode and triggering the watchdog is allowed as well as reading and clearing the status registers.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 119 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Certain SPI control bits used to configure device functionality can be locked to avoid unintentional bit
modification. The respective bit type is ‘rwl’. There are two levels of configuration locks:
•CFG_LOCK_0 in the HW_CTRL_1 is the level 0 lock mechanism: The bits CP_EN and GPIO can be locked. In 
case the configuration must be changed then CFG_LOCK_0 must be cleared first
•CFG_LOCK_1 in the HW_CTRL_2 is the level 1 lock mechanism: All other lockable bits with the type ‘rwl’ are 
locked and can only be modified at the next device power up
No status information can be lost, even if a bit changes right after the first 7 SPI clock cycles before the SPI
frame ends. In this case the status information field is updated with the next SPI command. However, the flag
is already set in the relevant status register.
The SBC status information from the SPI status registers is transmitted in a compressed format with each SPI
response on SDO in the so-called Status Information Field register (see also Figure 45). The purpose of this
register is to quickly signal changes in the SPI status registers to the microcontroller. This means that the
microcontroller only needs to read registers which have changed. 
Each bit in the Status Information Field represents a SPI status register (see Table 34). As soon as one bit is set
in one of the status registers, the corresponding bit in the Status Information Field register is set. Only the
most important registers are represented in the Status Information Field, e.g. the register WK_LVL_STAT is not
included.
For example if bit 0 in the Status Information Field is set to ‘1’, one or more bits of the register 100 0001
(SUP_STAT_0) are set to 1. Then this register needs to be read with a second SPI command. The bit in the
Status Information Field is set to 0 when all bits in the register 100 0001 have been reset to ‘0’.
Table 34  Status Information Field
Bit in Status 
Information Field
Corresponding Address 
Bit
Status Register Description
0 100 0001 SUP_STAT_0 - Supply Status: POR, VCC2 fail, VCC1 fail
1 100 0010 THERM_STAT - Thermal Protection Status
2 100 0011 DEV_STAT- Device Status: Mode before wake-up-
up/failure, WD Fail, SPI Fail, Failure
3 100 0100 BUS_STAT - Bus Failure Status: CAN; 
4 100 0110
100 0111
WK_STAT_0, WK_STAT_1 - Wake Source Status; 
Status bit is a combinational OR of both registers
5 100 0000 SUP_STAT_1: VS_UV, VCC1_WARN/OV
6 101 0100 GPIO_OC_STAT: GPIO over current
7 101 0101 GPIO_OL_STAT: GPIO open load

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 120 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 45 SPI Operation Mode

32-bit Register Access for SWK Control Registers

The operation of the 16-bit and 32-bit SPI data access is shown in Figure 46.

The 32-bit SPI data access is only available for the Selective Wake register addresses 010 0000 to 011 1111. The

registers SWK_OSC_CAL_H_STAT and SWK_OSC_CAL_L_STAT are excluded from the 32-bit SPI access.

The TLE9471-3ES tolerates reserved register access, i.e. registers that do not exist. In this case the next existing

address ‘011 1111’, then the higher addresses are ignored and the return value is ‘0x00’ for those addresses.

Figure 46 Data access for 16- and 32-bit SPI commands

0 1 2 3 4 5 76 8 9 10 11 12 13 1514

Data Bits

Address Bits

x x x x x x xx

R/W

0 1 2 3 4 5 76 8 9 10 11 12 13 1514

Data Bits

Status Information Field

x x x x x x xx

selected address

LSB MSB

time

LSB is sent first in SPI message

16-Bit SPI Access :

8-bit Address 8-bit Data of

Address

8-bit Address 8-bit Data of

Address

8-bit Data of

Address +1

8-bit Data of

Address +2

Status Information

Field

8-bit Data of

Address

Status Information

Field

8-bit Data of

Address

8-bit Data of

Address +1

8-bit Data of

Address +2

32-Bit SPI Access :

SPI Data Input (DI) SPI Data Output (DO)

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 121 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
13.4 SPI Bit Mapping
The following figures show the mapping of the registers and the SPI bits of the respective registers.
The Control Registers ‘000 0000’ to ‘001 1110’ are Read/Write Register. The registers ‘010 0000’ to ‘011 1111’
are dedicated control registers for CAN Partial Networking (=Selective Wake). Depending on bit 7 the bits are
only read (setting bit 7 to ‘0’) or also written (setting bit 7 to ‘1’). The new setting of the bit after a write can be
seen with a new read / write command.
The registers ‘100 0000’ to ‘111 1110’ are Status Registers and can be read or read with clearing the bit (if
possible) depending on bit 7. To clear a Data Byte of one of the Status Registers bit 7 must be set to ‘1’. The
registers  WK_LVL_STAT, and FAM_PROD_STAT,  SWK_OSC_CAL_H_STAT,  SWK_OSC_CAL_L_STAT,
SWK_STAT, SWK_ECNT_STAT, SWK_CDR_STAT1, SWK_CDR_STAT2 are an exception as they show the actual
voltage level at the respective WK pin (Low/High), or a fixed family/ product ID respectively and can thus not
be cleared. It is recommended for proper diagnosis to clear respective status bits for wake-up events or failure.
However, in general it is possible to enable drivers without clearing the respective failure flags.
When changing to a different SBC Mode, certain configurations bits is cleared automatically or modified:
• The SBC Mode bits are updated to the actual status, e.g. when returning to Normal Mode
• When changing to a low-power mode (Stop/Sleep), the diagnosis bits of the switches and transceivers are 
not cleared. FO will stay activated if it was triggered before.
• When changing to SBC Stop Mode, the CAN control bits will not be modified. 
• When changing to SBC Sleep Mode, the CAN control bits is modified if they were not Off or Wake Capable 
before. 
• VCC2 will stay On when going to Sleep-/Stop Mode (configuration can only be done in Normal Mode). 
Diagnosis is active. In case of a failure the regulator is turned Off and no wake-up is issued.
• The configuration bits for VCC2 in stand-alone configuration are cleared in SBC Restart Mode. FO will stay 
activated if it was triggered before. Depending on the respective configuration, CAN transceivers is either 
Off, woken or still Wake Capable.
Note: The detailed behavior of the respective SPI bits and control functions is described in Chapter 13.5, 
Chapter 13.6.and in the respective module chapter. The bit type be marked as ‘rwh’ in case the SBC 
will modify respective control bits.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 122 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 47 SPI Register Mapping Structure

The detailed register mappings for control registers and status registers are shown in Table 35 and Table 38

respectively.

The detailed SPI bit mapping overview is shown in Figure 48.

15 14 13 12 11 10 89 7 6 5 4 3 2 01

7 Address Bits [bits 0...6]

for Register Selection

8 Data Bits [bits 8...15]

for Configuration & Status Information

LSB

MSB

Reg.

Type

Control Registers

Addresses :

0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 1 1 1 1

Selective Wake

Control Registers

Status Registers

Status Information

Field Bit

Addresses :

0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 1 1 1 1 1

If CAN Partial Networking is not available for the respective variant

then this address space will be reserved

Addresses :

1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 0

The most important status registers are represented in the

Status Information Field

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 123 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 48 Detailed TLE9471-3ES SPI Bit Mapping

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6...0

Data Bit 15…8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

M_S_CTRL MODE_1 MODE_0 reserved VCC2_ON_1 VCC2_ON_0 VCC1_OV_RST VCC1_RT_1 VCC1_RT_0 read/write 0000001

HW_CTRL_0 reserved

SOFT_RESET_RST

FO_ON reserved reserved CP_EN reserved CFG1 read/write 0000010

WD_CTRL CHECKSUM WD_STM_EN_0 WD_WIN

WD_EN_WK_BUS

reserved WD_TIMER_2 WD_TIMER_1 WD_TIMER_0 read/write 0000011

BUS_CTRL_0 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved CAN_2 CAN_1 CAN_0 read/write 0000100

WK_CTRL_0 reserved TIMER_WK_EN reserved reserved reserved WD_STM_EN_1 reserved reserved read/write 0000110

WK_CTRL_1 INT_GLOBAL reserved WK_MEAS reserved reserved reserved reserved WK_EN read/write 0000111

WK_PUPD_CTRL

GPIO_WK_PUPD_1 GPIO_WK_PUPD_0

reserved reserved reserved reserved WK_PUPD_1 WK_PUPD_0 read/write 0001000

BUS_CTRL_3 reserved reserved reserved CAN_FLASH reserved reserved reserved reserved read/write 0001011

TIMER_CTRL reserved TIMER_ON_2 TIMER_ON_1 TIMER_ON_0 TIMER_PER_3 TIMER_PER_2 TIMER_PER_1 TIMER_PER_0 read/write 0001100

HW_CTRL_1 RSTN_HYS reserved TSD2_DEL RSTN_DEL CFG_LOCK_0 reserved reserved reserved read/write 0001110

HW_CTRL_2 2MHZ_FREQ_2 2MHZ_FREQ_1 2MHz_FREQ_0 I_PEAK_TH SS_MOD_FR_1 SS_MOD_FR_0 reserved CFG_LOCK_1 read/write 0001111

GPIO_CTRL reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved GPIO_2 GPIO_1 GPIO_0 read/write 0010111

PWM_CTRL PWM_DC_7 PWM_DC_6 PWM_DC_5 PWM_DC_4 PWM_DC_3 PWM_DC_2 PWM_DC_1 PWM_DC_0 read/write 0011000

PWM_FREQ_CTRL reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved PWM_FREQ_1 PWM_FREQ_0 read/write 0011100

HW_CTRL_3 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved TSD_THR ICC1_LIM_ADJ_1 ICC1_LIM_ADJ_0 read/write 0011101

SYS_STAT_CTRL_0 SYS_STAT_7 SYS_STAT_6 SYS_STAT_5 SYS_STAT_4 SYS_STAT_3 SYS_STAT_2 SYS_STAT_1 SYS_STAT_0 read/write 0011110

SYS_STAT_CTRL_1 SYS_STAT_15 SYS_STAT_14 SYS_STAT_13 SYS_STAT_12 SYS_STAT_11 SYS_STAT_10 SYS_STAT_9 SYS_STAT_8 read/write 0011111

SWK_CTRL OSC_CAL TRIM_EN_1 TRIM_EN_0 CANTO_MASK reserved reserved reserved CFG_VAL read/write 0100000

SWK_BTL0_CTRL TBIT_7 TBIT_6 TBIT_5 TBIT_4 TBIT_3 TBIT_2 TBIT_1 TBIT_0 read/write 0100001

SWK_BTL1_CTRL reserved reserved SP_5 SP_4 SP_3 SP_2 SP_1 SP_0 read/write 0100010

SWK_ID3_CTRL ID28 ID27 ID26 ID25 ID24 ID23 ID22 ID21 read/write 0100011

SWK_ID2_CTRL ID20 ID19 ID18 ID17 ID16 ID15 ID14 ID13 read/write 0100100

SWK_ID1_CTRL ID12 ID11 ID10 ID9 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 read/write 0100101

SWK_ID0_CTRL reserved ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 RTR IDE read/write 0100110

SWK_MASK_ID3_CTRL MASK_ID28 MASK_ID27 MASK_ID26 MASK_ID25 MASK_ID24 MASK_ID23 MASK_ID22 MASK_ID21 read/write 0100111

SWK_MASK_ID2_CTRL MASK_ID20 MASK_ID19 MASK_ID18 MASK_ID17 MASK_ID16 MASK_ID15 MASK_ID14 MASK_ID13 read/write 0101000

SWK_MASK_ID1_CTRL MASK_ID12 MASK_ID11 MASK_ID10 MASK_ID9 MASK_ID8 MASK_ID7 MASK_ID6 MASK_ID5 read/write 0101001

SWK_MASK_ID0_CTRL reserved MASK_ID4 MASK_ID3 MASK_ID2 MASK_ID1 MASK_ID0 reserved reserved read/write 0101010

SWK_DLC_CTRL reserved reserved reserved reserved DLC_3 DLC_2 DLC_1 DLC_0 read/write 0101011

SWK_DATA7_CTRL DATA7_7 DATA7_6 DATA7_5 DATA7_4 DATA7_3 DATA7_2 DATA7_1 DATA7_0 read/write 0101100

SWK_DATA6_CTRL DATA6_7 DATA6_6 DATA6_5 DATA6_4 DATA6_3 DATA6_2 DATA6_1 DATA6_0 read/write 0101101

SWK_DATA5_CTRL DATA5_7 DATA5_6 DATA5_5 DATA5_4 DATA5_3 DATA5_2 DATA5_1 DATA5_0 read/write 0101110

SWK_DATA4_CTRL DATA4_7 DATA4_6 DATA4_5 DATA4_4 DATA4_3 DATA4_2 DATA4_1 DATA4_0 read/write 0101111

SWK_DATA3_CTRL DATA3_7 DATA3_6 DATA3_5 DATA3_4 DATA3_3 DATA3_2 DATA3_1 DATA3_0 read/write 0110000

SWK_DATA2_CTRL DATA2_7 DATA2_6 DATA2_5 DATA2_4 DATA2_3 DATA2_2 DATA2_1 DATA2_0 read/write 0110001

SWK_DATA1_CTRL DATA1_7 DATA1_6 DATA1_5 DATA1_4 DATA1_3 DATA1_2 DATA1_1 DATA1_0 read/write 0110010

SWK_DATA0_CTRL DATA0_7 DATA0_6 DATA0_5 DATA0_4 DATA0_3 DATA0_2 DATA0_1 DATA0_0 read/write 0110011

SWK_CAN_FD_CTRL reserved reserved DIS_ERR_CNT RX_FILT_BYP FD_FILTER_2 FD_FILTER_1 FD_FILTER_0 CAN_FD_EN read/write 0110100

SWK_OSC_TRIM_CTRL reserved TRIM_OSC_6 TRIM_OSC_5 TRIM_OSC_4 TRIM_OSC_3 TRIM_OSC_2 TRIM_OSC_1 TRIM_OSC_0 read/write 0111000

SWK_OPT_CTRL RX_WK_SEL reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved read/write 0111001

SWK_OSC_CAL_H_STAT OSC_CAL_H_7 OSC_CAL_H_6 OSC_CAL_H_5 OSC_CAL_H_4 OSC_CAL_H_3 OSC_CAL_H_2 OSC_CAL_H_1 OSC_CAL_H_0 read 0111010

SWK_OSC_CAL_L_STAT OSC_CAL_L_7 OSC_CAL_L_6 OSC_CAL_L_5 OSC_CAL_L_4 OSC_CAL_L_3 OSC_CAL_L_2 OSC_CAL_L_1 OSC_CAL_L_0 read 0111011

SWK_CDR_CTRL1 reserved reserved reserved reserved SELFILT_1 SELFILT_0 reserved CDR_EN read/write 0111100

SWK_CDR_CTRL2 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved SEL_OSC_CLK_1

SEL_OSC_CLK_0

read/write 0111101

SWK_CDR_LIMIT_HIGH_CTRL CDR_LIM_H_7 CDR_LIM_H_6 CDR_LIM_H_5 CDR_LIM_H_4 CDR_LIM_H_3 CDR_LIM_H_2 CDR_LIM_H_1 CDR_LIM_H_0 read/write 0111110

SWK_CDR_LIMIT_LOW_CTRL CDR_LIM_L_7 CDR_LIM_L_6 CDR_LIM_L_5 CDR_LIM_L_4 CDR_LIM_L_3 CDR_LIM_L_2 CDR_LIM_L_1 CDR_LIM_L_0 read/write 0111111

SUP_STAT_1 reserved VS_UV VS_OV reserved reserved reserved VCC1_OV VCC1_WARN read/clear 1000000

SUP_STAT_0 POR reserved reserved VCC2_OT VCC2_UV VCC1_SC reserved VCC1_UV read/clear 1000001

THERM_STAT reserved reserved reserved reserved TSD2_SAFE TSD2 TSD1 TPW read/clear 1000010

DEV_STAT DEV_STAT_1 DEV_STAT_0 reserved reserved WD_FAIL_1 WD_FAIL_0 SPI_FAIL FAILURE read/clear 1000011

BUS_STAT reserved reserved reserved CANTO SYSERR CAN_FAIL_1 CAN_FAIL_0 VCAN_UV read/clear 1000100

WK_STAT_0 reserved reserved CAN_WU TIMER_WU reserved reserved reserved WK_WU read/clear 1000110

WK_STAT_1 reserved reserved reserved GPIO_WK_WU reserved reserved reserved reserved read/clear 1000111

WK_LVL_STAT SBC_DEV_LVL CFG0_STATE reserved GPIO_LVL reserved reserved reserved WK_LVL read 1001000

GPIO_OC_STAT reserved GPIO_HS_LS_OC reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved read/clear 1010100

GPIO_OL_STAT reserved GPIO_HS_OL reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved read/clear 1010101

SWK_STAT reserved SYNC reserved reserved CANSIL SWK_SET WUP WUF read 1110000

SWK_ECNT_STAT reserved reserved ECNT_5 ECNT_4 ECNT_3 ECNT_2 ECNT_1 ECNT_0 read 1110001

SWK_CDR_STAT1 N_AVG_11 N_AVG_10 N_AVG_9 N_AVG_8 N_AVG_7 N_AVG_6 N_AVG_5 N_AVG_4 read 1110010

SWK_CDR_STAT2 N_AVG_3 N_AVG_2 N_AVG_1 N_AVG_0 reserved reserved reserved reserved read 1110011

FAM_PROD_STAT FAM_3 FAM_2 FAM_1 FAM_0 PROD_3 PROD_2 PROD_1 PROD_0 read 1111110

Partial Networking Locked Bits (CFG_LOCK_0) Locked Bits (CFG_LOCK_1)

F A M I LY A N D P R O D U C T R E G I S T E R S

Access

Mode

Address

A6…A0

C O N T R O L R E G I S T E R S

S E L E C T I V E W A K E R E G I S T E R S

S E L E C T I V E W A K E T R I M & C O N F I G U R A T I O N S R E G I S T E R S

S T A T U S R E G I S T E R S

S E L E C T I V E W A K E S T A T U S R E G I S T E R S

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 124 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
13.5 SPI Control Registers
READ/WRITE Operation (see also Chapter 13.3):
• The ‘POR / Soft Reset Value’ defines the register content after POR or SBC Reset.
• The ‘Restart Value’ defines the register content after SBC Restart, where ‘x’ means the bit is unchanged.
• One 16-bit SPI command consist of two bytes:
- the 7-bit address and one additional bit for the register access mode and 
- following the data byte
The numbering of following bit definitions refers to the data byte and correspond to the bits D0...D7 and to 
the SPI bits 8...15. In case of 32-bit SPI commands, the data bytes from the next valid address are accessed 
(see also Figure 46).
• There are four different bit types:
– ‘r’ = READ: read only bits (or reserved bits)
– ‘rw’ = READ/WRITE: readable and writable bits
– ‘rwh’ = READ/WRITE/Hardware: readable/writable bits, which can also be modified by the SBC 
hardware
– ‘rwl’ = READ/WRITE/LOCKED: readable/writable bits, which are locked and cannot be modified 
anymore once the bit CFG_LOCK_0 in the HW_CTRL_1 or CFG_LOCK_1 in the HW_CTRL_2 register are 
set. The locking mechanism will remain active for all conditions (incl. Soft Reset) unless the bit 
CFG_LOCK_0 (for CP_EN or GPIO only) is cleared again; 
for bits relating to CFG_LOCK_1 the locking mechanism will remain active until the device is powered 
down (VS < VPOR,f) and can only be changed at the next device power-up.
After a soft reset command: If the respective lock bit is not set then the POR values are resumed; if the 
respective lock bit is set then the respective configurations stay unchanged, i.e. the soft reset has no 
effect on those configurations.
• Reserved bits are marked as “Reserved” and always read as “0”. The respective bits shall also be 
programmed as “0”.
• Reading a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “0” (= Read Only).
• Writing to a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “1”.
• SPI control bits are in general not cleared or changed automatically. This must be done by the 
microcontroller via SPI programming. Exceptions to this behavior are stated at the respective register 
description and the respective bit type is marked with a ‘h’ meaning that the SBC is able to change the 
register content.
The registers are addressed wordwise.

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 125 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Table 35  Register Overview: SPI Control Register
Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Reset Value
General Control Registers
M_S_CTRL Mode- and Supply Control 000 0001BPage 127
HW_CTRL_0 Hardware Control 0 000 0010BPage 128
WD_CTRL Watchdog Control 000 0011BPage 129
BUS_CTRL_0 Bus Control 0 000 0100BPage 129
WK_CTRL_0 Internal Wake Input Control 000 0110BPage 130
WK_CTRL_1 External Wake Source Control 000 0111BPage 131
WK_PUPD_CTRL Wake Input Level Control 000 1000BPage 132
BUS_CTRL_3 Bus Control 3 000 1011BPage 132
TIMER_CTRL Timer Control and Selection 000 1100BPage 133
HW_CTRL_1 Hardware Control 1 000 1110BPage 134
HW_CTRL_2 Hardware Control 2 000 1111BPage 134
GPIO_CTRL GPIO Configuration Control 001 0111BPage 135
PWM_CTRL PWM Configuration Control 001 1000BPage 136
PWM_FREQ_CTRL PWM Frequency Configuration Control 001 1100BPage 136
HW_CTRL_3 Hardware Control 3 001 1101BPage 137
SYS_STATUS_CTRL_0 System Status Control Low Byte 001 1110BPage 137
SYS_STATUS_CTRL_1 System Status Control High Byte 001 1111BPage 138
Selective Wake Control Registers
SWK_CTRL CAN Selective Wake Control 010 0000BPage 139
SWK_BTL0_CTRL SWK Bit Timing Logic Control1 010 0001BPage 139
SWK_BTL1_CTRL SWK Bit Timing Logic Control2 010 0010BPage 140
SWK_ID3_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier bits 28...21 010 0011BPage 140
SWK_ID2_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier bits 20...13 010 0100BPage 140
SWK_ID1_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier bits 12...5 010 0101BPage 141
SWK_ID0_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier bits 4...0 010 0110BPage 141
SWK_MASK_ID3_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier Mask bits 28...21 010 0111BPage 141
SWK_MASK_ID2_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier Mask bits 20..13 010 1000BPage 142
SWK_MASK_ID1_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier Mask bits 12...5 010 1001BPage 142
SWK_MASK_ID0_CTRL SWK WUF Identifier Mask bits 4...0 010 1010BPage 142
SWK_DLC_CTRL SWK Frame Data Length Code Control 010 1011BPage 143
SWK_DATA7_CTRL SWK Data7 Register 010 1100BPage 143
SWK_DATA6_CTRL SWK Data6 Register 010 1101BPage 144
SWK_DATA5_CTRL SWK Data5 Register 010 1110BPage 144
SWK_DATA4_CTRL SWK Data4 Register 010 1111BPage 144
SWK_DATA3_CTRL SWK Data3 Register 011 0000BPage 144
SWK_DATA2_CTRL SWK Data2 Register 011 0001BPage 145

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 126 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
SWK_DATA1_CTRL SWK Data1 Register 011 0010BPage 145
SWK_DATA0_CTRL SWK Data0 Register 011 0011BPage 145
SWK_CAN_FD_CTRL CAN FD Configuration Control Register 011 0100BPage 145
SWK_OSC_TRIM_CTRL SWK Oscillator Trimming Register 011 1000BPage 146
SWK_OPT_CTRL Selective Wake Options Register  011 1001BPage 147
SWK_OSC_CAL_H_STAT SWK Oscillator Calibration High Register 011 1010BPage 147
SWK_OSC_CAL_L_STAT SWK Oscillator Calibration Low Register 011 1011BPage 147
SWK_CDR_CTRL1 CDR Control 1 Register 011 1100BPage 148
SWK_CDR_CTRL2 CDR Control 2 Register 011 1101BPage 148
SWK_CDR_LIMIT_HIGH_
CTRL
SWK CDR Upper Limit Control 011 1110BPage 149
SWK_CDR_LIMIT_LOW_C
TRL
SWK CDR Lower Limit Control 011 1111BPage 149
Table 35  Register Overview: SPI Control Register (cont’d)
Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Reset Value

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 127 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

13.5.1 General Control Registers

Notes

1. It is not possible to change from Stop to Sleep Mode via SPI Command. See also the State Machine Chapter

2. In a transition from SBC Stop to SBC Normal Mode a change of the bits [4:0] is ignored and the SPI_FAIL bit is

set. The transition to SBC Normal Mode is executed.

3. After entering SBC Restart Mode, the MODE bits is automatically set to SBC Normal Mode. The VCC2_ON bits

is automatically set to Off after entering SBC Restart Mode and after over temperature (OT).

4. The SPI output will always show the previously written state with a Write Command (what has been

programmed before)

5. When in SBC Development Mode the POR/Soft Reset value of VCC2_ON = ‘11’, i.e. VCC2 is On in SBC Init Mode

but is switched Off with a Soft Reset command

M_S_CTRL

Mode- and Supply Control (Address 000 0001B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0000 00xxB

76543210

MODE Reserved VCC2_ON VCC1_OV_RST VCC1_RT

rwh r rwh rwh rw

Field Bits Type Description

MODE 7:6 rwh SBC Mode Control

00B, SBC Normal Mode

01B, SBC Sleep Mode

10B, SBC Stop Mode

11B, SBC Reset: Soft Reset is executed (configuration of RSTN

triggering in bit SOFT_RESET_RST)

Reserved 5r Reserved, always reads as 0

VCC2_ON 4:3 rwh VCC2 Mode Control

00B, VCC2 Off

01B, VCC2 On in Normal Mode

10B, VCC2 On in Normal and Stop Mode

11B, VCC2 always On (except in SBC Init - if not in SBC

Development Mode, SBC Restart and Fail-Safe Mode)

VCC1_OV_R

2rwhVCC1 Over Voltage leading to Restart / Fail-Safe Mode enable

0B, VCC1_ OV is set in case of VCC1_OV; no SBC Restart or Fail-

Safe is entered for VCC1_OV

1B, VCC1_ OV is set in case of VCC1_OV; depending on the device

configuration SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode is entered

(see Chapter 5.1.1);

VCC1_RT 1:0 rw VCC1 Reset Threshold Control

00B, Vrt1 selected (highest threshold)

01B, Vrt2 selected

10B, Vrt3 selected

11B, Vrt4 selected

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 128 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. Clearing the FO_ON bit will not disable the FO output in case a failure occurred which triggered the FO output.

In this case the FO output have to be disabled by clearing the FAILURE bit.

If the FO_ON bit is set by the software then it is cleared by the SBC after SBC Restart Mode was entered and

the FO output is disabled (if no failures occurred which triggered the fail outputs). See also Chapter 11 for FO

activation and deactivation.

2. In case the CFG_LOCK_1 bit is set, then the soft reset value for SOFT_RESET_RST will stay unchanged, i.e. ‘x’;

the same applies if CFG_LOCK_0 is set: then the soft reset value of the bit CP_EN will stay unchanged, i.e. ‘x’.

Therefore, the respective soft reset values are marked as ‘y’.

HW_CTRL_0

Hardware Control 0 (Address 000 0010B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0y00 0y00B; Restart Value: 0x00 0x0xB

76543210

Reserved SOFT_RESET_

RST FO_ON Reserved CP_EN Reserved CFG1

r rwl rwh r rwl r rw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

SOFT_RESE

T_RST

6rwlSoft Reset Configuration

0B, RST is triggered (pulled Low) during a Soft Reset

1B, no RST trigger during a Soft Reset

FO_ON 5rwhFailure Output Activation

0B, FO not activated by software, FO is activated by specified

failures (see Chapter 11.1.1)

1B, FO activated by software (via SPI), only if configured as FO

Reserved 4:3 r Reserved, always reads as 0

CP_EN 2rwlCharge Pump Output Enable

0B, Charge Pump is Off

1B, Charge Pump Output is enabled (see Chapter 5)

Reserved 1r Reserved, always reads as 0

CFG1 0rwConfiguration Select 1 (see also Table 5)

0B, Depending on hardware configuration, SBC Restart or Fail-

Safe Mode is reached after the 2. watchdog trigger failure

(=default) - Config 3/4

1B, Depending on hardware configuration, SBC Restart or Fail-

Safe Mode is reached after the 1. watchdog trigger failure -

Config 1/2

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 129 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. See also Chapter 12.2.4 for more information on disabling the watchdog in SBC Stop Mode.

2. See Chapter 12.2.5 for more information on the effect of the bit WD_EN_WK_BUS.

3. See Chapter 12.2.3 for calculation of checksum.

WD_CTRL

Watchdog Control (Address 000 0011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0001 0100B; Restart Value: x0xx 0100B

76543210

CHECKSUM WD_STM_EN_

0WD_WIN WD_EN_WK_

BUS Reserved WD_TIMER

rw rwh rw rw r rwh

Field Bits Type Description

CHECKSUM 7rwWatchdog Setting Check Sum Bit

The sum of bits 7:0 needs to have even parity (see Chapter 12.2.3)

0B, Counts as 0 for checksum calculation

1B, Counts as 1 for checksum calculation

WD_STM_

EN_0

6rwhWatchdog Deactivation during Stop Mode, bit 0 (Chapter 12.2.4)

0B, Watchdog is active in Stop Mode

1B, Watchdog is deactivated in Stop Mode

WD_WIN 5rwWatchdog Type Selection

0B, Watchdog works as a Time-Out watchdog

1B, Watchdog works as a Window watchdog

WD_EN_

WK_BUS

4rwWatchdog Enable after Bus (CAN) Wake-up in SBC Stop Mode

0B, Watchdog will not start after a CAN wake-up

1B, Watchdog starts with a long open window after CAN Wake

Reserved 3r Reserved, always reads as 0

WD_TIMER 2:0 rwh Watchdog Timer Period

000B, 10ms

001B, 20ms

010B, 50ms

011B, 100ms

100B, 200ms

101B, 500ms

110B, 1000ms

111B, 10000ms

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 130 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. The reset values for the CAN transceivers are marked with ‘y’ because they will vary depending on the cause

of change - see below.

2. see Figure 24 for detailed state changes of CAN Transceiver for different SBC modes.

3. The bit CAN_2 is not modified by the SBC but can only be changed by the user. Therefore, the bit type is ‘rw’

compared to bits CAN_0 and CAN_1.

4. In case SYSERR = 0 and the CAN transceiver is configured to ‘x11’ while going to SBC Sleep Mode, it is

automatically set to Wake Capable (‘x01’). The SPI bits are changed to Wake Capable. If configured to ‘x10’

and SBC Sleep Mode is entered, then the transceiver is set to Wake Capable, while it will stay in Receive Only

Mode when it had been configured to ‘x10’ when going to SBC Stop Mode. If it had been configured to Wake

Capable or Off then the mode will remain unchanged.The Receive Only Mode has to be selected by the user

before entering SBC Stop Mode. Please refer to Chapter 5.6.4 for detailed information on the Selective Wake

mode changes.

5. Failure Handling Mechanism: When the device enters Fail-Safe Mode due to a failure (TSD2, WD-Failure,...),

then BUS_CTRL_0 is modified by the SBC to ‘0000 0x01’ to ensure that the device can be woken again. See also

the description in Chapter 5.6.4.5 and for WK_CTRL_1 for other wake sources when entering SBC Fail-Safe

Mode.

6. When in SBC Development Mode the POR/Soft Reset value of CAN = ‘011’

BUS_CTRL_0

Bus Control 0 (Address 000 0100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0000 0yyyB

76543210

Reserved CAN

rrwh

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:3 r Reserved, always reads as 0

CAN 2:0 rwh HS-CAN Module Modes (CAN_2 is rw type)

000B, CAN Off

001B, CAN is Wake Capable (no SWK)

010B, CAN Receive Only Mode (no SWK)

011B, CAN Normal Mode (no SWK)

100B, CAN Off

101B, CAN is Wake Capable with SWK

110B, CAN Receive Only Mode with SWK

111B, CAN Normal Mode with SWK

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 131 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: WD_STM_EN_1 will also be cleared when changing from SBC Stop to Normal Mode

WK_CTRL_0

Internal Wake Input Control (Address 000 0110B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0x00 0000B

76543210

Reserved TIMER_WK_E

NReserved WD_STM_EN_

1Reserved

rrw r rwh r

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

TIMER_WK_

6rwTimer Wake Source Control (for Cyclic Wake)

0B, Timer wake-up disabled

1B, Timer is enabled as a wake source

Reserved 5:3 r Reserved, always reads as 0

WD_STM_

EN_1

2rwhWatchdog Deactivation during Stop Mode, bit 1 (Chapter 12.2.4)

0B, Watchdog is active in Stop Mode

1B, Watchdog is deactivated in Stop Mode

Reserved 1:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

WK_CTRL_1

External Wake Source Control (Address 000 0111B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0001B; Restart Value: x0x0 000xB

76543210

INT_GLOBAL Reserved WK_MEAS Reserved WK_EN

rw r rw r rw

Field Bits Type Description

INT_

GLOBAL

7rwGlobal Interrupt Configuration (see also Chapter 10.1)

0B, Only wake sources trigger INTN (default)

1B, All status information register bits will trigger INTN

(including all wake sources)

Reserved 6r Reserved, always reads as 0

WK_MEAS 5rwWake / Voltage Sensing Selection (see also Chapter 9.2.4)

0B, Wake-up functionality enabled for WK

1B, Voltage sensing functionality enabled, no wake-up events

are generated

Reserved 4:1 r Reserved, always reads as 0

WK_EN 0rwWK Wake Source Control

0B, WK wake-up disabled

1B, WK is enabled as a wake source

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 132 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. WK_MEAS is by default configured for standard WK functionality (Static Sense on WK). If WK_MEAS is set and

FO is not activated then the bits WK_EN and GPIO_CTRL are ignored. If FO is activated then WK_MEAS cannot

be set to ‘1’ and SPI_Fail is set. If the bit is set to ‘1’ then the measurement function is enabled during Normal

Mode & the bits WK_EN are ignored. The bits WK_LVL and GPIO_LVL bits are not updated and are reset.

2. The wake source CAN is selected in the register BUS_CTRL_0 by setting the respective bits to ‘Wake Capable’

3. Failure Handling Mechanism: When the device enters SBC Fail-Safe Mode due to a failure (TSD2, WD-

Failure,...) and WK_MEAS = ‘0’, the WK_CTRL_1 is modified by the SBC to ‘x0x0 0001’ in order to ensure that the

device can be woken again. In case WK_MEAS is ‘1’ then WK will not be available as an automatic wake source

in SBC Fail-Safe Mode.

WK_PUPD_CTRL

Wake Input Level Control (Address 000 1000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xx00 00xxB

76543210

GPIO_WK_PUPD Reserved WK_PUPD

rw r rw

Field Bits Type Description

GPIO_WK_P

UPD

7:6 rw GPIO WK Pull-Up / Pull-Down Configuration (only if GPIO

configured as WK)

00B, No pull-up / pull-down selected

01B, Pull-down resistor selected

10B, Pull-up resistor selected

11B, Automatic switching to pull-up or pull-down

Reserved 5:2 r Reserved, always reads as 0

WK_PUPD 1:0 rw WK Pull-Up / Pull-Down Configuration

00B, No pull-up / pull-down selected

01B, Pull-down resistor selected

10B, Pull-up resistor selected

11B, Automatic switching to pull-up or pull-down

BUS_CTRL_3

Bus Control 3 (Address 000 1011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 000x 0000B

76543210

Reserved CAN_Flash Reserved

rrw r

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:5 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 133 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: The electrical parameters for the CAN FD communication are ensured up to 5MBaud for the default

setting (CAN_Flash is cleared). In case higher communication rates are required then CAN_Flash can

be set.

CAN_Flash 4rwHS-CAN Flash Mode Activation

0B, Flash Mode disabled: CAN communication up to 5MBaud

1B, Flash Mode enabled: CAN communication for higher than

5MBaud (higher emission on CAN bus - no slew rate control)

Reserved 3:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TIMER_CTRL

Timer Control and Selection (Address 000 1100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0000 0000B

76543210

Reserved TIMER_ON TIMER_PER

rrwh rwh

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

TIMER_

6:4 rwh Timer On-Time Configuration

000B, Off / Low (timer not running, HSx output is Low)

001B, 0.1ms On-time

010B, 0.3ms On-time

011B, 1.0ms On-time

100B, 10ms On-time

101B, 20ms On-time

110B, Off / High (timer not running, HSx output is High)

111B, reserved

TIMER_

PER

3:0 rwh Timer Period Configuration

0000B, 10ms

0001B, 20ms

0010B, 50ms

0011B, 100ms

0100B, 200ms

0101B, 500ms

0110B, 1s

0111B, 2s

1000B, 5s

1001B, 10s

1010B, 20s

1011B, 50s

1100B, 100s

1101B, 200s

1110B, 500s

1111B, 1000s

Field Bits Type Description

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 134 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
Notes
1. The timer must be first assigned and is then automatically activated as soon as the On-time is configured.
2. If Cyclic Sense is selected and the GPIO HS switch is cleared during SBC Restart Mode then also the timer 
settings (period and On-time) are cleared to avoid incorrect switch detection. However, the timer settings are 
not cleared in case of failure not leading to SBC Restart Mode. This must be considered by the application.
3. in case the timer is set as wake sources and Cyclic Sense is running, then both Cyclic Sense and Cyclic Wake 
are active at the same time.
4. A new timer configuration will become active immediately, i.e. as soon as CSN goes High.
Notes
1. See also Chapter 12.5 for selection of VCC1 undervoltage hysteresis
2. See also Chapter 12.8 for minimum waiting time in case of an TSD2 event
3. The bit CFG_LOCK_0 is used to prevent an unintentional modification of the charge pump activation bit 
CP_EN and the GPIO configuration bits GPIO. In case the charge pump output state or the GPIO configuration 
must be changed then it is necessary to clear CFG_LOCK_0. The other lockable bits are controlled by the lock 
bit CFG_LOCK_1. In case either lock bit is set then the respective locked bits cannot be changed by a soft reset. 
Therefore, the respective soft reset values are marked as ‘y’.
4. In case CFG_LOCK_1 bit are set, then the respective soft reset value is like the Restart value.
HW_CTRL_1
Hardware Control 1 (Address 000 1110B)
POR / Soft Reset Value: y0yy y000B; Restart Value: x0xx x000B
76543210
RSTN_HYS Reserved TSD2_DEL RSTN_DEL CFG_LOCK_0 Reserved
rwl r rwl rwl rw r
Field Bits Type Description
RSTN_HYS 7rwlVCC1 Undervoltage Reset Hysteresis Selection (see also 
Chapter 12.5.1 for more information)
0B, default hysteresis applies as specified in the electrical 
characteristics table
1B, the highest rising threshold (Vrt1,r) is always used for the 
release of the undervoltage reset 
Reserved 6r Reserved, always reads as 0
TSD2_DEL 5rwlTSD2 Minimum Waiting Time Selection
0B, Minimum waiting time until TSD2 is released again is always 
1s
1B, Minimum waiting time until TSD2 is released again is 1s, 
after >16 consecutive TSD2 events, it is extended to x64
RSTN_DEL 4rwlReset Delay Time Selection
0B, The extended reset delay time tRD1is selected (default)
1B, The reduced tRD2 reset delay time is selected
CFG_LOCK_
0
3rwConfiguration Lock Bit - Level 0
0B, CP_EN and GPIO can be modified
1B, CP_EN and GPIO is locked and cannot be modified
Reserved 2:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 135 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. The configuration locking becomes effective after CSN changes from Low to High once the CFG_LOCK_1 bit

was set. The locking is active until the next device power-up (VS < VPOR,f), i.e. also CFG_LOCK_1 is locked in this

case. The CFG_LOCK_1 will stay unchanged by a soft reset.

2. After tRD1 has expired, the default value is resumed after power-up or the configured value after SBC Sleep- or

Fail-Safe Mode. In case the CFG_LOCK_1 bit is set, then the soft reset value is like the Restart value.

HW_CTRL_2

Hardware Control 2 (Address 000 1111B)

POR Value: 0100 0000B; Restart Value/Soft Reset Value: xxxx xxyxB

76543210

2MHZ_FREQ I_PEAK_TH SS_MOD_FR Reserved CFG_LOCK_1

rwl rwl rwl rwrr rwl

Field Bits Type Description

2MHZ_FREQ 7:5 rwl SMPS and Charge Pump Switching Frequency Setting

000B, 1.8MHz

001B, 2.0MHz (default value)

010B, 2.2MHz

011B, 2.4MHz

100B, Reserved

101B, Reserved

110B, Reserved

111B, Reserved

I_PEAK_TH 4rwlVCC1 Active Peak Threshold Selection

0B, low VCC1 active peak threshold selected (ICC1,peak_1)

1B, high VCC1 active peak threshold selected (ICC1,peak_2).

SS_MOD_FR 3:2 rwl Spread Spectrum Modulation Frequency Setting of integrated

2MHz oscillator for charge pump and SMPS regulator

00B, Spread Spectrum disabled

01B, 15.625kHz Modulation Frequency

10B, 31.250kHz Modulation Frequency

11B, 62.500kHz Modulation Frequency

Reserved 1r Reserved, always reads as 0

CFG_LOCK_

0rwlConfiguration Lock Bit - Level 1

0B, Bits with bit type ‘rwl’ (except CP_EN and GPIO) can be

modified

1B, Bits with bit type ‘rwl’ (except CP_EN and GPIO) are locked

and cannot be modified anymore until next device power-up.

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 136 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. The Restart and Soft Reset Value depends on the respective GPIO configuration. Therefore the bit type is also

‘rwhl’ and the restart value is ‘y’. See also Table 30 in Chapter 11.1.2 for more information on the GPIO

behavior for the different SBC modes and Restart behavior.

2. In case the CFG_LOCK_0 bit is set, then the soft reset value is like the Restart value.

3. If GPIO is configured as a wake input, then it is a default wake source in SBC Fail-Safe Mode .

Notes

1. 0% and 100% duty cycle settings are used to have the switch turned On or Off respectively.

2. A new duty cycle configuration will become effective after the previous period is completed.

3. The desired duty cycle should be set first before GPIO is enabled as PWM HS or PWM LS.

GPIO_CTRL

GPIO Configuration Control (Address 001 0111B)

POR Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value/Soft Reset Value: 0000 0yyyB

76543210

Reserved GPIO

rrwhl

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:3 r Reserved, always reads as 0

GPIO 2:0 rwhl GPIO Configuration

000B, FO selected (default)

001B, FO selected

010B, FO selected

011B, High-Side controlled by TIMER (Cyclic Sense)

100B, Off

101B, Wake input enabled (16us static filter)

110B, Low-Side Switch controlled by PWM

111B, High-Side Switch controlled by PWM

PWM_CTRL

PWM Configuration Control (Address 001 1000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

PWM_DC

Field Bits Type Description

PWM_DC 7:0 rw PWM Duty Cycle Setting (bit0 = LSB; bit7 = MSB)

0000 0000B, 100% Off, i.e. HS/LS = Off

xxxx xxxxB, On with duty cycle fraction of 255

1111 1111B, 100% On, i.e. HS/LS always On

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 137 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: A frequency change will become effective after the previous period is completed

Notes

1. In case the CFG_LOCK_1 bit is set, then the soft reset value is like the Restart value., i.e. the configuration stays

unchanged.

PWM_FREQ_CTRL

PWM Frequency Configuration Control (Address 001 1100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0000 00xxB

76543210

Reserved PWM_FREQ

rrw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:2 r Reserved, always reads as 0

PWM_FREQ 1:0 rw Spread Spectrum Modulation Frequency Setting

00B, 100Hz configuration

01B, 200Hz configuration

10B, 325Hz configuration

11B, 400Hz configuration

HW_CTRL_3

Hardware Control 3 (Address 001 1101B)

POR Value: 0000 0001B; Restart Value/Soft Reset Value: 0000 0xxxB

76543210

Reserved TSD_THR ICC1_LIM_ADJ

rrwlrwl

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:3 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TSD_THR 2rwlThermal Shutdown Threshold (TSD1 & TSD2) Configuration

0B, Default shutdown threshold selected

1B, higher shutdown threshold selected

ICC1_LIM_A

1:0 rwl Configuration of ICC1 current limitation

00B, 1 step down from default value (-25% of typ. default)

01B, default value (typ. 1000mA)

10B, 1 step up form default value (+20% of default)

11B, 2 steps up from default value (+50% of default), setting not

recommended

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 138 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. The SYS_STATUS_CTRL_0 register is an exception for the default values, i.e. it will keep its configured value

also after a Soft Reset.

2. This byte is intended for storing system configurations of the ECU by the microcontroller and is only writable

in SBC Normal Mode and readable in SBC Stop Mode. The byte is not accessible by the SBC and contents are

kept also after SBC Fail-Safe, Restart Mode or after Soft Reset. It allows the microcontroller to store system

configuration without loosing the data as long as the SBC supply voltage is above VPOR,f.

Notes

1. The SYS_STATUS_CTRL_1 register has the same functionality and behavior as SYS_STATUS_CTRL_0.

SYS_STATUS_CTRL_0

System Status Control Low Byte (Address 001 1110B)

POR Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value/Soft Reset Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

SYS_STAT_L

Field Bits Type Description

SYS_STAT_L 7:0 rw System Status Control Low Byte (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

Dedicated byte for system configuration, access only by

microcontroller. Cleared after power up and Soft Reset

SYS_STATUS_CTRL_1

System Status Control High Byte (Address 001 1111B)

POR Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value/Soft Reset Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

SYS_STAT_H

Field Bits Type Description

SYS_STAT_H 7:0 rw System Status Control High Byte (bit8=LSB; bit15=MSB)

Dedicated byte for system configuration, access only by

microcontroller. Cleared after power up and Soft Reset

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 139 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

13.5.2 Selective Wake Control Registers

Notes

1. TRIM_EN unlocks the oscillation calibration mode. Only the bit combination ‘11’ is the valid unlock. The pin

TXDCAN is used for oscillator synchronisation (trimming).

2. The microcontroller needs to validate the SWK configuration and set ‘CFG_VAL’ to ‘1’. The SBC will only enable

SWK if CFG_VAL’ to ‘1’. The bit is cleared automatically by the SBC after a wake-up or POR or if a SWK

configuration data is changed by the microcontroller.

3. CANTO bit will only be updated inside BUS_STAT while CAN_2 is set. Therefore, an interrupt is only signalled

upon occurrence of CANTO while CAN_2 (SWK is enabled) is set in SBC Normal and Stop Mode.

4. TRIM_EN also unlocks the writing to the SWK_OPT_CTRL register in order to enable the alternate low-power

Receiver for Selective wake to optimize the quiescent current consumption. Only the bit combination ‘11’

unlocks the calibrations / configurations.

SWK_CTRL

CAN Selective Wake Control (Address 010 0000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx 0000B

76543210

OSC_CAL TRIM_EN CANTO_MASK Reserved CFG_VAL

rw rw rw r rwh

Field Bits Type Description

OSC_CAL 7rwOscillator Calibration Mode

0B, Oscillator Calibration is disabled

1B, Oscillator Calibration is enabled

TRIM_EN 6:5 rw (Un)locking mechanism of oscillator recalibration

00B, locked

01B, locked

10B, locked

11B, unlocked

CANTO_

MASK

4rwCAN Time Out Masking

0B, CAN time-out is masked - no interrupt (on pin INTN) is

triggered

1B, CAN time-ut is signaled on INTN

Reserved 3:1 r Reserved, always reads as 0

CFG_VAL 0rwhSWK Configuration valid

0B, Configuration is not valid (SWK not possible)

1B, SWK configuration valid, needs to be set to enable SWK

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 140 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: Please note the configuration of the standard identifier and extended identifier. The standard

identifier is configured to the bits ID18...ID28

SWK_BTL0_CTRL

SWK Bit Timing Logic Control1 (Address 010 0001B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 1010 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

TBIT

Field Bits Type Description

TBIT 7:0 rw Number of Time Quanta in a Bit Time

Represents the number of time quanta in a bit time.

Quanta is depending on SEL_OSC_CLK<1:0> from the

SWK_CDR_CTRL2 register.

SWK_BTL1_CTRL

SWK Bit Timing Control2 (Address 010 0010B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0011 0011B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

Reserved SP

rrw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:6 r Reserved, always reads as 0

SP 5:0 rw Sampling Point Position

Represents the sampling point position (fractional number < 1).

Example: 0011 0011 = 0.796875 (~80%)

SWK_ID3_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier bits 28...21 (Address 010 0011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

ID28_21

Field Bits Type Description

ID28_21 7:0 rw WUF Identifier Bits 28...21

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 141 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: The setting RTR = 1 is not allowed for wake-up frames according to the ISO11898-2

SWK_ID2_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier bits 20...13 (Address 010 0100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

ID20_13

Field Bits Type Description

ID20_13 7:0 rw WUF Identifier Bits 20...13

SWK_ID1_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier bits 12...5 (Address 010 0101B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

ID12_5

Field Bits Type Description

ID12_5 7:0 rw WUF Identifier Bits 12...5

SWK_ID0_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier bits 4...0 (Address 010 0110B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0xxx xxxxB

76543210

Reserved ID4_0 RTR IDE

rrwrwrw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

ID4_0 6:2 rw WUF Identifier Bits 4..0

RTR 1rwRemote Transmission Request Field (acc. ISO 11898-1)

0B, Normal Data Frame

1B, Remote Transmission Request

IDE 0rwIdentifier Extension Bit

0B, Standard Identifier Length (11 bit)

1B, Extended Identifier Length (29 bit)

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 142 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: Masking WUF bits is done by setting the respective MASK bit to ‘1’

SWK_MASK_ID3_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier Mask bits 28...21 (Address 010 0111B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

MASK_ID28_21

Field Bits Type Description

MASK_ID28_

7:0 rw WUF Identifier Mask Bits 28...21

0B, Unmasked - bit is ignored

1B, Masked - bit is compared in CAN frame

SWK_MASK_ID2_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier Mask bits 20...13 (Address 010 1000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

MASK_ID20_13

Field Bits Type Description

MASK_ID20_

7:0 rw WUF Identifier Mask Bits 20...13

0B, Unmasked - bit is ignored

1B, Masked - bit is compared in CAN frame

SWK_MASK_ID1_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier Mask bits 12...5 (Address 010 1001B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

MASK_ID12_5

Field Bits Type Description

MASK_ID12_

7:0 rw WUF Identifier Mask Bits 12...5

0B, Unmasked - bit is ignored

1B, Masked - bit is compared in CAN frame

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 143 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: The number of transmitted bytes in the data field has to be indicated by the DLC. The DLC value

consists of four bits. The admissible number of data bytes for a data frame is in a range from zero to

eight. DLCs in the range of zero to seven indicate data fields of length of zero to seven bytes. DLCs in

the range from eight to fifteen indicate data fields with a length of eight bytes. The configured DLC

value has to match bit by bit with the DLC in the received wake-up frame (refer also to

Chapter 5.6.2.3).

SWK_MASK_ID0_CTRL

SWK WUF Identifier bits 4...0 (Address 010 1010B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0xxx xx00B

76543210

Reserved MASK_ID4_0 Reserved

rrw r

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

MASK_

ID4_0

6:2 rw WUF Identifier MASK Bits 4..0

0B, Unmasked - bit is ignored

1B, Masked - bit is compared in CAN frame

Reserved 1:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

SWK_DLC_CTRL

SWK Frame Data Length Code Control (Address 010 1011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0000 xxxxB

76543210

Reserved DLC

rrw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:4 r Reserved, always reads as 0

DLC 3:0 rw Payload length in number of bytes

0000B, Frame Data Length = 0 or cleared

0001B, Frame Data Length = 1

0010B, Frame Data Length = 2

0011B, Frame Data Length = 3

0100B, Frame Data Length = 4

0101B, Frame Data Length = 5

0110B, Frame Data Length = 6

0111B, Frame Data Length = 7

from 1000B to 1111B Frame Data Length = 8

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 144 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

SWK_DATA7_CTRL

SWK Data7 Register (Address 010 1100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA7

Field Bits Type Description

DATA7 7:0 rw Data7 byte content(bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

SWK_DATA6_CTRL

SWK Data6 Register (Address 010 1101B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA6

Field Bits Type Description

DATA6 7:0 rw Data6 byte content (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

SWK_DATA5_CTRL

SWK Data5 Register (Address 010 1110B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA5

Field Bits Type Description

DATA5 7:0 rw Data5 byte content (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

SWK_DATA4_CTRL

SWK Data4 Register (Address 010 1111B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA4

Field Bits Type Description

DATA4 7:0 rw Data4 byte content (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 145 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

SWK_DATA3_CTRL

SWK Data3 Register (Address 011 0000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA3

Field Bits Type Description

DATA3 7:0 rw Data3 byte content (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

SWK_DATA2_CTRL

SWK Data2 Register (Address 011 0001B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA2

Field Bits Type Description

DATA2 7:0 rw Data2 byte content (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

SWK_DATA1_CTRL

SWK Data1 Register (Address 011 0010B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA1

Field Bits Type Description

DATA1 7:0 rw Data1 byte content (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

SWK_DATA0_CTRL

SWK Data0 Register (Address 011 0011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

DATA0

Field Bits Type Description

DATA0 7:0 rw Data0 byte content (bit0=LSB; bit7=MSB)

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 146 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: The bit RX_FILT_ BYP is bypassing the analog filter in the CAN receiver path; The FD_FILTER is not in

the analog path of the CAN receiver and is not bypassed.

Note: DIS_ERR_ CNT is cleared by the SBC at tsilence expiration.

Note: The Normal-Mode CAN receiver (RX_WK_ SEL = ‘1’) has to selected with a CAN FD tolerant operation

for baud rates > 1MBit/s

SWK_CAN_FD_CTRL

CAN FD Configuration Control Register (Address 011 0100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 00xx xxxxB

76543210

Reserved DIS_ERR_CNT RX_FILT_BYP FD_FILTER CAN_FD_EN

r rwh rw rw rw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:6 r Reserved, always reads as 0

DIS_ERR_

CNT

5rwhError Counter Disable Function

0B, Error Counter is enabled during SWK

1B, Error counter is disabled during SWK only if CAN_FD_EN = ‘1’

RX_FILT_

BYP

4rwRX Receiver Filter Bypass

0B, RX Filter not bypassed

1B, RX Filter bypassed

FD_FILTER 3:1 rw CAN FD Dominant Filter Time

000B, 50 ns

001B, 100 ns

010B, 150 ns

011B, 200 ns

100B, 250 ns

101B, 300 ns

110B, 350 ns

111B, 700 ns

CAN_FD_

0rwEnable CAN FD Tolerant Mode

0B, CAN FD Tolerant Mode disabled

1B, CAN FD Tolerant Mode enabled

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 147 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: Due to CDR functionality, it is not required to change these values.

Note: The bit RX_WK_SEL is used to select the respective receiver during Selective Wake operation. The

lowest quiescent current during Frame Detect Mode is achieved with the default setting RX_WK_SEL

= ‘0’, i.e. the Low-Power Receiver is already selected.

SWK_OSC_TRIM_CTRL

SWK Oscillator Trimming Register (Address 011 1000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: xxxx xxxxB; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

Reserved TRIM_OSC

rw rw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7rwReserved, reads preset value - do not modify

TRIM_OSC 6:0 rw Oscillator trimming (bit0=LSB; bit6=MSB);

(only writable if TRIM_EN = ‘11’)

SWK_OPT_CTRL

Selective Wake Options Register (Address 011 1001B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 000x xxxxB; Restart Value: x00x xxxxB

76543210

RX_WK_SEL Reserved Reserved

rw r rw

Field Bits Type Description

RX_WK_

SEL

7rwSWK Receiver selection (only accessible if TRIM_EN = ‘11’)

0B, Low-Power Receiver selected during SWK

1B, Standard Receiver selected during SWK

Reserved 6:5 r Reserved, always reads as 0

Reserved 4:0 rw Reserved, reads preset value - do not modify

SWK_OSC_CAL_H_STAT

SWK Oscillator Calibration High Register (Address 011 1010B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

OSC_CAL_H

Field Bits Type Description

OSC_CAL_

7:0 r Oscillator Calibration High Register

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 148 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

SWK_OSC_CAL_L_STAT

SWK Oscillator Calibration Low Register (Address 011 1011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

OSC_CAL_L

Field Bits Type Description

OSC_CAL_L 7:0 r Oscillator Calibration Low Register

SWK_CDR_CTRL1

CDR Control 1 Register (Address 011 1100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0100B; Restart Value: 0000 xx0xB

76543210

Reserved SEL_FILT Reserved CDR_EN

rrwrrw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:4 r Reserved, always reads as 0

SEL_FILT 3:2 rw Select Time Constant of Filter

00B, Time constant 8

01B, Time constant 16 (default)

10B, Time constant 32

11B, adapt

distance between falling edges 2, 3 bit: Time constant 32

distance between f. edges 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 bit: Time constant 16

distance between falling edges 9, 10 bit: Time constant 8

Reserved 1r Reserved, always reads as 0

CDR_EN 0rwEnable CDR

0B, CDR disabled

1B, CDR enabled

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 149 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

SWK_CDR_CTRL2

CDR Control 2Register (Address 011 1101B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0000 00xxB

76543210

Reserved SEL_OSC_CLK

rrw

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:2 r Reserved, always reads as 0

SEL_OSC_CL

1:0 rw Input Frequency for CDR module

See Table 36 and Table 37.

Table 36 Frequency Settings of Internal Clock for the CDR

SEL_OSC_CLK[1:0] int. Clock for CDR

00 80 MHz

01 40 MHz

10 20 MHz

11 10 MHz

Table 37 Recommended CDR Settings for Different Baud Rates

SEL_OSC_CLK

[1:0]

Baudrate SWK_BTL0_CTRL Value SWK_CDR_LIMIT_HIGH_

CTRL Value

SWK_CDR_LIMIT_LOW_

CTRL Value

00 500k 1010 0000 1010 1000 1001 1000

01 500k 0101 0000 0101 0100 0100 1100

10 500k CDR Setting not recommended for this baudrate due to insufficient precision

11 500k CDR Setting not recommended for this baudrate due to insufficient precision

00 250k CDR Setting not to be used due to excessive time quanta (counter overflow)

01 250k 1010 0000 1010 1000 1001 1000

10 250k 0101 0000 0101 0100 0100 1100

11 250k CDR Setting not recommended for this baudrate due to insufficient precision

00 125k CDR Setting not to be used due to excessive time quanta (counter overflow)

01 125k CDR Setting not to be used due to excessive time quanta (counter overflow)

10 125k 1010 0000 1010 1000 1001 1000

11 125k 0101 0000 0101 0100 0100 1100

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 150 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

SWK_CDR_LIMIT_HIGH_CTRL

SWK CDR Upper Limit Control (Address 011 1110B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 1010 1000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

CDR_LIM_H

Field Bits Type Description

CDR_LIM_H 7:0 rw Upper Bit Time Detection Range of Clock and Data Recovery

SWK_BTL0_CTRL values > + 5% is clamped

SWK_CDR_LIMIT_LOW_CTRL

SWK CDR Lower Limit Control (Address 011 1111B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 1001 1000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

CDR_LIM_L

Field Bits Type Description

CDR_LIM_L 7:0 rw Lower Bit Time Detection Range of Clock and Data Recovery

SWK_BTL0_CTRL values < - 5% is clamped

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 151 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
13.6 SPI Status Information Registers
READ/CLEAR Operation (see also Chapter 13.3):
• One 16-bit SPI command consist of two bytes:
- the 7-bit address and one additional bit for the register access mode and 
- following the data byte
The numbering of following bit definitions refers to the data byte and correspond to the bits D0...D7 and to 
the SPI bits 8...15 (see also figure).
• There are two different bit types:
- ‘r’ = READ: read only bits (or reserved bits)
- ‘rc’ = READ/CLEAR: readable and clearable bits
• Reading a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “0” (= Read Only)
• Clearing a register is done byte wise by setting the SPI bit 7 to “1”
• SPI status registers are in general not cleared or changed automatically (an exception are the WD_FAIL 
bits). This must be done by the microcontroller via SPI command
The registers are addressed wordwise.
Table 38  Register Overview: SPI Status Information Registers
Register Short Name Register Long Name Offset Address Reset Value
General Status Registers
SUP_STAT_1 Supply Voltage Fail Status 100 0000BPage 151
SUP_STAT_0 Supply Voltage Fail Status 100 0001BPage 151
THERM_STAT Thermal Protection Status 100 0010BPage 152
DEV_STAT Device Information Status 100 0011BPage 153
BUS_STAT Bus Communication Status 100 0100BPage 154
WK_STAT_0 Wake-up Source and Information Status 0 100 0110BPage 155
WK_STAT_1 Wake-up Source and Information Status 1 100 0111BPage 155
WK_LVL_STAT WK Input Level 100 1000BPage 155
GPIO_OC_STAT GPIO Overcurrent Status 101 0100BPage 156
GPIO_OL_STAT GPIO Open-Load Status 101 0101BPage 157
Selective Wake Status Registers
SWK_STAT Selective Wake Status 111 0000BPage 158
SWK_ECNT_STAT SWK Status 111 0001BPage 158
SWK_CDR_STAT1 CDR Status 1 Register 111 0010BPage 159
SWK_CDR_STAT2 CDR Status 2 Register 111 0011BPage 159
Family and Product Information Register
FAM_PROD_STAT Family and Product Identification Register 111 1110BPage 160

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 152 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

13.6.1 General Status Registers

Notes

1. The VCC1 undervoltage prewarning threshold VPW,f / VPW,r is a fixed threshold and independent of the VCC1

undervoltage reset thresholds.

2. VS under voltage monitoring is not available in SBC Stop Mode due to current consumption saving

requirements. Exception: VS under voltage detection is also available in SBC Stop Mode if the VCC1 load

current is above the active peak threshold (I_PEAK_TH) or if VCC1 is below the VCC1 prewarning threshold

(VCC1_ WARN is set)

3. VS over voltage monitoring is not available in SBC Stop Mode due to current consumption saving

requirements. Exception: VS over voltage detection is always available when the charge pump is enabled

(CP_EN = ‘1’) and also in SBC Stop Mode if the VCC1 load current is above the active peak threshold

(I_PEAK_TH) or if VCC1 is below the VCC1 prewarning threshold (VCC1_ WARN is set)

SUP_STAT_1

Supply Voltage Fail Status (Address 100 0000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0xx0 00xxB

76543210

Reserved VS_UV VS_OV Reserved VCC1_OV VCC1_WARN

rrcrc r rcrc

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

VS_UV 6rcVS Undervoltage Detection (VS,UV)

0B, No VS undervoltage detected

1B, VS undervoltage detected (detection is only active when

VCC1 is enabled - see also note below)

VS_OV 5rcVS Overvoltage Detection (VS,UV)

0B, No VS overvoltage detected

1B, VS overvoltage detected (detection is only active when VCC1

is enabled - see also note below)

Reserved 4:2 r Reserved, always reads as 0

VCC1_

1rcVCC1 Overvoltage Detection (VCC1,OV,r)

0B, No VCC1 overvoltage warning

1B, VCC1 overvoltage detected

VCC1_

WARN

0rcVCC1 Undervoltage Prewarning (VPW,f)

0B, No VCC1 undervoltage prewarning

1B, VCC1 undervoltage prewarning detected

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 153 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. The MSB of the POR/Soft Reset value is marked as ‘y’: the default value of the POR bit is set after Power-on

reset (POR value = 1000 0000). However it is cleared after a SBC Soft Reset command (Soft Reset value =

0000 0000).

2. During Sleep Mode, the bits VCC1_SC, VCC1_OV and VCC1_UV will not be set when VCC1 is Off

3. The VCC1_UV bit is never updated in SBC Restart Mode, in SBC Init Mode it is only updated after RSTN was

released, it is always updated in SBC Normal and Stop Mode, and it is always updated in any SBC modes in a

VCC1_SC condition (after VCC1_UV = 1 for >2ms).

SUP_STAT_0

Supply Voltage Fail Status (Address 100 0001B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: y000 0000B; Restart Value: x00x xx0xB

76543210

POR Reserved VCC2_OT VCC2_UV VCC1_SC Reserved VCC1_UV

rc r rcrcrc r rc

Field Bits Type Description

POR 7rcPower-On Reset Detection

0B, No POR

1B, POR occurred

Reserved 6:5 r Reserved, always reads as 0

VCC2_OT 4rcVCC2 Over Temperature Detection

0B, No over temperature

1B, VCC2 over temperature detected

VCC2_UV 3rcVCC2 Under Voltage Detection (VCC2,UV,f)

0B, No VCC2 Under voltage

1B, VCC2 under voltage detected

VCC1_SC 2rcVCC1 Short to GND Detection (<Vrtx for t>2ms after switch On)

0B, No short

1B, VCC1 short to GND detected

Reserved 1r Reserved, always reads as 0

VCC1_UV 0rcVCC1 UV-Detection (due to Vrtx reset)

0B, No VCC1_UV detection

1B, VCC1 UV-Fail detected

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 154 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: Temperature warning and shutdown bits are not reset automatically, even if the temperature pre

warning or the TSD condition is not present anymore.

THERM_STAT

Thermal Protection Status (Address 100 0010B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0000 xxxxB

76543210

Reserved TSD2_SAFE TSD2 TSD1 TPW

rrcrcrcrc

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:4 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TSD2_SAFE 3rcTSD2 Thermal Shut-Down Safe State Detection

0B, No TSD2 safe state detected

1B, TSD2 safe state detected: >16 consecutive TSD2 events

occurred, next TSD2 waiting time is 60s

TSD2 2rcTSD2 Thermal Shut-Down Detection

0B, No TSD2 event

1B, TSD2 OT detected - leading to SBC Fail-Safe Mode

TSD1 1rcTSD1 Thermal Shut-Down Detection

0B, No TSD1 fail

1B, TSD1 OT detected (affected module is disabled)

TPW 0rcThermal Pre Warning

0B, No Thermal Pre warning

1B, Thermal Pre warning detected

DEV_STAT

Device Information Status (Address 100 0011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xx00 xxxxB

76543210

DEV_STAT Reserved WD_FAIL SPI_FAIL FAILURE

rc r rh rc rc

Field Bits Type Description

DEV_STAT 7:6 rc Device Status before Restart Mode

00B, Cleared (Register must be actively cleared)

01B, Restart due to failure (WD fail, TSD2, VCC1_UV, trial to access

SLEEP MODE without any wake source activated); also after a

wake-up from Fail-Safe Mode

10B, Sleep Mode

11B, Reserved

Reserved 5:4 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 155 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. The bits DEV_STAT show the status of the device before exiting SBC Restart Mode. Either the device came from

regular SBC Sleep Mode or a failure (SBC Restart or SBC Fail-Safe Mode) occurred. See also “Invalid SPI

Commands” in Chapter 13.2. Coming from SBC Sleep Mode will also be shown if there was a trial to enter SBC

Sleep Mode without having cleared all wake flags before.

2. The WD_FAIL bits are implemented as a counter and are the only status bits, which are cleared automatically

by the SBC. See also Chapter 11.1.1.

3. The SPI_FAIL bit can only be cleared via SPI command

4. In case of Config 2/4 the WD_Fail counter is frozen in case of WD trigger failure until a successful WD trigger.

WD_FAIL 3:2 rh Number of WD-Failure Events (1/2 WD failures depending on CFG1)

00B, No WD Fail

01B, 1x WD Fail, FO activation - Config 2 selected

10B, 2x WD Fail, FO activation - Config 1 / 3 / 4 selected

11B, Reserved (never reached)

SPI_FAIL 1rcSPI Fail Information

0B, No SPI fail

1B, Invalid SPI command detected

FAILURE 0rcActivation of Fail Output FO

0B, No Failure

1B, Failure occurred

BUS_STAT

Bus Communication Status (Address 100 0100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 000x xxxxB

76543210

Reserved Reserved CANTO SYSERR CAN_FAIL VCAN_UV

r r rc rc rc rc

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

Reserved 6:5 r Reserved, always reads as 0

CANTO 4rcCAN Time Out Detection

0B, Normal operation

1B, CAN Time Out detected

SYSERR 3rcSWK System Error

0B, Selective Wake Mode is possible

1B, System Error detected, SWK enabling not possible

CAN_FAIL 2:1 rc CAN Failure Status

00B, No error

01B, CAN TSD shutdown

10B, CAN_TXD_DOM: TXD dominant time out detected (P_9.3.39)

11B, CAN_BUS_DOM: BUS dominant time out detected (P_9.3.40)

Field Bits Type Description

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 156 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Notes

1. CAN Recovery Conditions:

1.) TXD Time Out: TXD goes High or transmitter is set to Wake Capable or switched Off;

2.). Bus dominant time out: Bus will become recessive or transceiver is set to Wake Capable or switched Off.

3.) Supply under voltage: as soon as the threshold is crossed again, i.e. VCAN > VCAN_UV for CAN

4.)In all cases (also for TSD shutdown): to enable the Bus transmission again, TXD needs to be High (recessive)

for a certain time (transmitter enable time).

2. The VCAN_UV comparator is enabled if the mode bit CAN_1 = ‘1’, i.e. in CAN Normal or CAN Receive Only Mode.

3. CANTO is set only if CAN2 = 1 (=SWK Mode enabled). It is set as soon as CANSIL was set and will stay set even

in CANSIL it is reset. An interrupt is issued in SBC Stop- and SBC Normal Mode as soon as CANTO is set and the

interrupt is not masked out, i.e. CANTO_MASK must be set to ‘1’.

4. The SYSERR Flag is set in case of a configuration error and in case of an error counter overflow (n>32).

It is only updated if SWK is enabled (CAN_2 = ‘1’). See also Chapter 5.6.3.6.

5. CANTO is set asynchronously to the INTN pulse. In order to prevent undesired clearing of CANTO and thus

possibly missing this interrupt, the bit is prevented from clearing (i.e. cannot be cleared) until the next falling

edge of INTN.

Note: The respective wake source bit will also be set when the device is woken from SBC Fail-Safe Mode

VCAN_UV 0rcUnder voltage CAN Bus Supply

0B, Normal operation

1B, CAN Supply under voltage detected. Transmitter disabled

WK_STAT_0

Wake-up Source and Information Status 0 (Address 100 0110B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 00xx x00xB

76543210

Reserved CAN_WU TIMER_WU Reserved WK_WU

rrcrc r rc

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:6 r Reserved, always reads as 0

CAN_WU 5rcWake-up via CAN Bus

0B, No Wake-up

1B, Wake-up

TIMER_WU 4rcWake-up via TimerX

0B, No Wake-up

1B, Wake-up

Reserved 3:1 r Reserved, always reads as 0

WK_WU 0rcWake-up via WK

0B, No Wake-up

1B, Wake-up

Field Bits Type Description

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 157 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: WK_LVL_STAT is updated in SBC Normal and Stop Mode and also in SBC Init and Restart Mode. See

below for exceptions. In Cyclic Sense or wake mode, the registers contain the sampled level, i.e. the

registers are updated after every sampling.

Note: GPIO_LVL is updated in SBC Normal and Stop Mode and also in SBC Init and Restart Mode if

configured as wake input, low-side switch or high-side switch without Cyclic Sense (in case of FO

WK_STAT_1

Wake-up Source and Information Status 1 (Address 100 0111B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0x00 0000B

76543210

Reserved GPIO_WK_WU Reserved

rrc r

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:5 r Reserved, always reads as 0

GPIO_WK_W

4rcWake-up via GPIO if configured as WK

0B, No Wake-up

1B, Wake-up

Reserved 3:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

WK_LVL_STAT

WK Input Level (Address 100 1000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: xx0x 000xB; Restart Value: xx0x 000xB

76543210

SBC_DEV_LVL CFG0_STATE Reserved GPIO_LVL Reserved WK_LVL

rrrr r r

Field Bits Type Description

SBC_DEV

_LVL

7r Status of SBC Operating Mode at TEST Pin

0B, User Mode activated

1B, SBC Development Mode activated

CFG0_STATE 6r Device Configuration Status on pin INTN

0B, No external pull-up resistor connected on INTN (Config 2/4)

1B, External pull-up resistor connected on INTN (Config 1/3)

Reserved 5r Reserved, always reads as 0

GPIO_LVL 4r Status of GPIO if configured as GPIO (WK, LS or HS function)

0B, Low Level (=0)

1B, High Level (=1)

Reserved 3:1 r Reserved, always reads as 0

WK_LVL 0r Status of WK

0B, Low Level (=0)

1B, High Level (=1)

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 158 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

configuration the status is flagged with the FAILURE bit). In case the respective feature is disabled

then the WK_LVL_STAT bit will not be updated.

Note: In case the HV measurement function is enabled (WK_MEAS=1), then the bits WK_LVL and GPIO_LVL

are not updated and reset.

Note: The same status bit is used for the low-side and high-side configuration. The bit always applies for

the actual configuration. In case the switch is disabled or another configuration is used then a

flagged bit will stay set until it is cleared by the microcontroller;

GPIO_OC_STAT

GPIO Overcurrent Status (Address 101 0100B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0x00 0000B

76543210

Reserved GPIO_OC Reserved

rrc r

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

GPIO_OC 6rcOvercurrent Detection on GPIO (if configured as LS or HS)

0B, No OC

1B, OC detected

Reserved 5:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

GPIO_OL_STAT

GPIO Open-Load Status (Address 101 0101B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0x00 0000B

76543210

Reserved GPIO_OL Reserved

rrc r

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

GPIO_OL 6rcOpen-Load Detection on GPIO (if configured as HS)

0B, No OL

1B, OL detected

Reserved 5:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 159 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

13.6.2 Selective Wake Status Registers

Note: SWK_SET is set to flag that the selective wake functionality is activated (SYSERR = 0, CFG_VAL = 1,

CAN_2 = 1). The selective wake function is activated via a CAN mode change, except if CAN = ‘100’.

SWK_STAT

Selective Wake Status (Address 111 0000B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 0x00 xxxxB

76543210

Reserved SYNC Reserved CANSIL SWK_SET WUP WUF

rr r rrrr

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7r Reserved, always reads as 0

SYNC 6r Synchronisation (at least one CAN frame without fail must have

been received)

0B, SWK function not working or not synchronous to CAN bus

1B, Valid CAN frame received, SWK function is synchronous to

CAN bus

Reserved 5:4 r Reserved, always reads as 0

CANSIL 3r CAN Silent Time during SWK operation

0B, tsilence not exceeded

1B, set if tsilence is exceeded.

SWK_SET 2r Selective Wake Activity

0B, Selective Wake is not active

1B, Selective Wake is activated

WUP 1r Wake-up Pattern Detection

0B, No WUP

1B, WUP detected

WUF 0r SWK Wake-up Frame Detection (acc. ISO 11898-2:2016)

0B, No WUF

1B, WUF detected

SWK_ECNT_STAT

SWK Status (Address 111 0001B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: 00xx xxxxB

76543210

Reserved ECNT

Field Bits Type Description

Reserved 7:6 r Reserved, always reads as 0

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 160 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Note: If a frame has been received that is valid according to ISO 11898-1 and the counter is not zero, then

the counter shall be decremented. If the counter has reached a value of 32, the following actions

shall be performed: Selective Wake function shall be disabled, SYSERR shall be set and CAN Wake

Capable function shall be enabled, which leads to a wake-up with the next WUP.

ECNT 5:0 r SWK CAN Frame Error Counter

00 0000B, No Frame Error

01 1111B, 31 Frame Errors have been counted

10 0000B, Error counter overflow - SWK function is disabled

SWK_CDR_STAT1

CDR Status 1 Register (Address 111 0010B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 1010 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

NAVG_SAT

Field Bits Type Description

NAVG_SAT 7:0 r Output Value from Filter Block

N_AVG is representing the integer part of the number of selected

input clock frequency per CAN bus bit.

N_AVG[11:4] e.g.160.75

SWK_CDR_STAT2

CDR Status 2 Register (Address 111 0011B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0000 0000B; Restart Value: xxxx xxxxB

76543210

NAVG_SAT Reserved

Field Bits Type Description

NAVG_SAT 7:4 r Output Value from Filter Block

N_AVG is representing the fractional part of the number of selected

input clock frequency per CAN bus bit.

N_AVG[3:0] e.g.160.75

Reserved 3:0 r Reserved, always reads as 0

Field Bits Type Description

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 161 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

13.6.3 Family and Product Information Register

Notes

1. The actual default register value after POR, Soft Reset or Restart of PROD depends on the respective device.

Therefore the value ‘y’ is specified.

2. SWK = Selective Wake feature in CAN Partial Networking standard

FAM_PROD_STAT

Family and Product Identification Register (Address 111 1110B)

POR / Soft Reset Value: 0101 yyyy B; Restart Value: 0101 yyyyB

76543210

FAM PROD

Field Bits Type Description

FAM 7:4 r SBC Family Identifier (bit4=LSB; bit7=MSB)

0 0 01B, Driver SBC Family

0 0 10B, DC/DC-SBC Family

0 0 11B, Mid-Range SBC Family

0 100B, Multi-CAN SBC Family

0 101B, LITE SBC Family

0 111B, Mid-Range+ SBC Family

x x x xB, reserved for future products

PROD 3:0 r SBC Product Identifier (bit0=LSB; bit3=MSB)

0 1 10B, TLE9461ES (VCC1 = 5V, no SWK) / TLE9461-3ES (VCC1 = 5V,

SWK)

0 1 1 1B, TLE9461ESV33 (VCC1 = 3.3V, no SWK) / TLE9461-3ESV33

(VCC1 = 3.3V, SWK)

1 1 1 0B, TLE9471ES (VCC1 = 5V, no SWK) /

TLE9471-3ES(VCC1 = 5V, SWK)

1 1 1 1B, TLE9471ESV33 (VCC1 = 3.3V, no SWK) /

TLE9471-3ESV33 (VCC1 = 3.3V, SWK)

TLE9471-3ES
Lite CAN SBC Family
 
Serial Peripheral Interface
 
Data Sheet 162 Rev. 1.0 
 2018-08-01
13.7 Electrical Characteristics
Table 39 Electrical Characteristics
VS = 5.5 V to 28 V, Tj = -40°C to +150°C, all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin
(unless otherwise specified)
Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or 
Test Condition
Number
Min. Typ. Max.
SPI frequency
Maximum SPI frequency fSPI,max ––4.0MHz
1) P_16.7.1
SPI Interface; Logic Inputs SDI, CLK and CSN
H-input Voltage Threshold VIH – – 0.7× 
VCC1
V – P_16.7.2
L-input Voltage Threshold VIL 0.3 × 
VCC1
– – V – P_16.7.3
Hysteresis of input Voltage VIHY 0.08 × 
VCC1
0.12 × 
VCC1
0.4 × 
VCC1
V1) P_16.7.4
Pull-up Resistance at pin CSN RICSN 25 40 55 kΩVCSN = 0.7 x VCC1 P_16.7.5
Pull-down Resistance at pin 
SDI and CLK
RICLK/SDI 25 40 55 kΩVSDI/CLK = 
0.2 x VCC1
P_16.7.6
Input Capacitance at pin 
CSN, SDI or CLK
CI–10–pF
1) P_16.7.7
Logic Output SDO
H-output Voltage Level VSDOH 0.8 × 
VCC1
––VIDOH = -1.6 mA P_16.7.8
L-output Voltage Level VSDOL – – 0.2 × 
VCC1
VIDOL = 1.6 mA P_16.7.9
Tristate Leakage Current ISDOLK -10 – 10 µA VCSN = VCC1;
0 V < VDO < VCC1
P_16.7.10
Tristate Input Capacitance CSDO –1015pF
1) P_16.7.11
Data Input Timing1)
Clock Period tpCLK 250 – – ns – P_16.7.12
Clock High Time tCLKH 125 – – ns – P_16.7.13
Clock Low Time tCLKL 125 – – ns – P_16.7.14
Clock Low before CSN Low tbef 125 – – ns – P_16.7.15
CSN Setup Time tlead 250 – – ns – P_16.7.16
CLK Setup Time tlag 250 – – ns – P_16.7.17
Clock Low after CSN High tbeh 125 – – ns – P_16.7.18
SDI Set-up Time tDISU 100 – – ns – P_16.7.19
SDI Hold Time tDIHO 50 – – ns – P_16.7.20
Input Signal Rise Time at pin 
SDI, CLK and CSN
trIN – – 50 ns – P_16.7.21

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Serial Peripheral Interface

Data Sheet 163 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

Figure 49 SPI Timing Diagram

Note: Numbers in drawing correlate to the last 2 digits of the Number field in the Electrical Characteristics

table.

Input Signal Fall Time at pin

SDI, CLK and CSN

tfIN – – 50 ns – P_16.7.22

Delay Time for Mode Changes tDel,Mode ––6µs

2) includes internal

oscillator

tolerance

P_16.7.23

CSN High Time tCSN(High) 3 – – µs – P_16.7.24

Data Output Timing1)

SDO Rise Time trSDO –3080nsCL = 100 pF P_16.7.25

SDO Fall Time tfSDO –3080nsCL = 100 pF P_16.7.26

SDO Enable Time tENSDO – – 50 ns low impedance P_16.7.27

SDO Disable Time tDISSDO – – 50 ns high impedance P_16.7.28

SDO Valid Time tVASDO ––50nsCL = 100 pF P_16.7.29

1) Not subject to production test; specified by design

2) Applies to all mode changes triggered via SPI commands

Table 39 Electrical Characteristics (cont’d)

VS = 5.5 V to 28 V, Tj = -40°C to +150°C, all voltages with respect to ground, positive current flowing into pin

(unless otherwise specified)

Parameter Symbol Values Unit Note or

Test Condition

Number

Min. Typ. Max.

CSN

CLK

SDI

SDO

1413

not defined LSB MSB

Flag LSB MSB

27 29

15 18

Data Sheet 164 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

14 Application Information

Note: The following information is given as a hint for the implementation of the device only and shall not

be regarded as a description or warranty of a certain functionality, condition or quality of the device.

14.1 Application Diagrams

Figure 50 TLE9471-3ES Application Diagram

Notes

1. This is a very simplified example of an application circuit. The function must be always verified in the real

application.

2. Reverse polarity protection circuitry (D2, R10, R11) is mandatory for dynamic reverse polarity requirements,

i.e. if load is not to be turned On. To further reduce the quiescent current, a diode can be placed optionally in

series with GND and R11.

CANH

CANL

TLE9471

VBAT

CC2

µC

TXDCAN

RXDCAN

INT

CLK

CSN

SDI

SDO

VDD

VSS

sup

LED Driver & other loads

up to 10A p eak

(reverse polarity protected)

Device pr ote ction

against reverse

ba tte ry

Ga te pr ote cti on

Le aka ge

di sch ar ge

Reve rse ba tte ry

switch a fte r Kl. 30

switch because

ot he rwise n ot

possible

Opt. gate

pr o tecti o n

Note: Leave TEST pin open or

connected to GND to select SBC user

mode operation. Connect to VCC1 for

SBC Development Mode selection.

BCKSW

VCC1

VCC2

CLK

CSN

SDI

SDO

RSTN

INTN

TEST

TXDCAN

RXDCAN

GND

CANL

CANH

WK/

VSENSE

FO/

GPIO

VCP

VCAN

LOGIC

State

Machine

CAN cell

CC2

CC1

Data Sheet 165 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

Figure 51 shows the required circuitry for an off-board LED control using the GPIO pin with the high-side

switch configuration.

Figure 51 Simplified Application Diagram showing a off-board LED control with the GPIO pin

Note: This is a very simplified example of an application circuit. The off-board LED control function must

be verified in the real application. The external circuitry is a minimum requirement and may vary

depending on respective requirements. The same protection requirments apply for the

configuration of FO/GPIO as low-side switch or wake input.

TLE9471

VBAT

µC

TXDCAN

RXDCAN

INT

CLK

CSN

SDI

SDO

VDD

VSS

sup

CLK

CSN

SDI

SDO

RSTN

INTN

TXDCAN

RXDCAN

FO/

GPIO

VCC1

BCKSW

LOGIC

State

Machine

GND

Data Sheet 166 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

Figure 52 Simplified Application Diagram showing the Alternate High-Voltage Measurement Function via

WK/SENSE and FO/GPIO

Note: This is a simplified example of an application circuit. The function must be verified in the real

application. WK must be connected to signal to be measured and FO/GPIO is the output to the

microcontroller supervision function. The maximum current into WK must be <500uA. The minimum

current into WK should be >5uA to ensure proper operation.

CSN

CLK

SDI

SDO

µC

TxD CAN

RxD CAN

INT

CSN

CLK

SDO

SDI

TxD CAN

RxD CAN

CC1

INTN

RSTN

LOGIC

State

Machine

VBAT

TLE9471

FO/

GPIO

ADC_x

Vbat_uC

≥10k

≥10n

Vbat_uC

max.

500uA

ISO Pulse

protection

MEAS

Note:

Max. WK input current limited to

500 µA to ensure accuracy and

proper operation ;

BCKSW

VCC1

sup

GND

Data Sheet 167 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

Figure 53 Increasing the Robustness of the pin TEST during Debugging or Programming

TEST

EXT

Connector

/Jumper

TEST

SBC Dev.

Mode

Detection

during SBC

Init Mode

TEST

VCC1

Data Sheet 168 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

Table 40 Bill of Material for Simplified Application Diagram

Ref. Typical Value Purpose / Comment

Capacitances

C1 4.7µF Optional input filter capacitor, recommended for suppression of EME

C2 68µF Buffering capacitor to cut off battery spikes, value depending on

application requirements

C3 100nF ceramic EMC, blocking capacitor, ceramic X7R or equivalent, ESR < 50 mΩ

C4 22µF low ESR Blocking capacitor, min. 10µF for stability (for a buck switching

frequency of 2.2MHz). Please refer to Table 22 for recommended min.

and max. values incl. max. ESR value

C5 100nF ceramic Spike filtering, ceramic X7R or equivalent, ESR < 50 mΩ to improve

stability of supply for microcontroller; not needed for SBC

C6 2.2µF low ESR Blocking capacitor, min. 470nF for stability;

if used for CAN supply place a 100nF ceramic capacitor in addition very

close to VCAN pin for optimum EMC behavior

C7 4.7nF / OEM dependent Split termination stability

C8,9 10nF Spike filtering, as required by application,

mandatory protection for off-board connections, (see also Simplified

Application Diagram with the Alternate Measurement Function)

C10 22nF As required by application and GPIO current capability (see also

Chapter 11.1.2), mandatory protection for off-board connections

Inductances

L1 2.2µH Optional input filter inductor, recommended for suppression of EME

L2 10µH Output voltage inductor (for a buck switching frequency of 2.2MHz).

Please refer to Table 22 for recommended min. and max. values

Resistances

R1 1kΩDevice protection against reverse battery

R2 60Ω / OEM dependent CAN bus termination

R3 60Ω / OEM dependent CAN bus termination

R4 10kΩWetting current of the switch, as required by application

R5,6 10kΩWK pin current limitation, e.g. for ISO pulses (see also Simplified

Application Diagram with the Alternate Measurement Function)

R7, 8 depending on

application

and microcontroller

Voltage Divider resistor to adjust measurement voltage to

microcontroller ADC input range (see also Simplified Application

Diagram with the Alternate Measurement Function)

R9 10ΩAs required by application, ESD protection, mandatory protection for

off-board connections only

R10, 11 47kΩReverse battery protection

R12 100kΩLeakage discharge resistor

Active Components

D1 e.g. BAS 3010A, Infineon Reverse polarity protection for VS supply pins

Data Sheet 169 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

D2 e.g. BAS 21, Infineon Reverse battery protection

D3 12V Zener Diode Gate protection

D4 e.g. BAS 21, Infineon Reverse battery protection for measurement circuitry

D5 e.g. LED circuit example: Illumination LED

T1 e.g. IPB80N04S4-04 Terminal 30 (Kl. 30) Switch, N-MOSFET

T2 e.g. IPB80N04S4-04 Reverse battery protection, N-MOSFET

T3 e.g. BCR191W High active FO control

uC e.g. TC2xxx Microcontroller

Table 40 Bill of Material for Simplified Application Diagram (cont’d)

Ref. Typical Value Purpose / Comment

Data Sheet 170 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

14.2 ESD Tests

Tests for ESD robustness according to IEC61000-4-2 “GUN test” (150 pF, 330 Ω) have been performed.

The results and test condition are available in a test report. The values for the tests are listed below.

EMC and ESD susceptibility tests according to SAE J2962-2 (V. 2014-01-23) have been performed. Tested by

external test house (Jakob Mooser GmbH, Test report Nr. 146 / 2018)

Table 41 ESD “GUN test”1)2)

1) ESD susceptibility “ESD GUN” according to EMC 1.3 Test specification, Section 4.3 (IEC 61000-4-2). Tested by external

test house (IBEE Zwickau, EMC Test report Nr. 02-05-18).

2) ESD Test “Gun Test” is specified with external components for pins VS, WK, and VCC2. See the application diagram in

Chapter 14.1 for more information

Performed Test Result Unit Remarks

ESD at pins CANH, CANL, VS, WK, VCC2

versus GND

> 6 kV positive pulse

ESD at pins CANH, CANL, VS, WK, VCC2

versus GND

< -6 kV negative pulse

Data Sheet 171 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

14.3 Thermal Behavior of Package

Figure 54 Thermal Resistance (Rth_JA) vs. Cooling Area

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000

RthJA (K/W)

Bottom Cooling Area (mm²)

2s2p - 15 Vias, Ta = 125°C

2s2p

15 Vias, Ta = 85°C

2s2p - 15 Vias, Ta = 25°C

Data Sheet 172 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Application Information

Figure 55 Board Setup

Board setup is defined according JESD 51-2, -5, -7.

Board: 75 x 75 x 1.5mm3 with 2 inner copper layers (35µm thick), with thermal via array under the exposed pad

contacting the first inner copper layer and 300mm2 cooling area on the bottom layer (70µm).

14.4 Further Application Information

• Please contact us for information regarding the pin FMEA

• For further information you may contact http://www.infineon.com/

PCB (top view) PCB (bottom view) Detail SolderArea

5 mm

70µm modelled (traces)

35µm, 90% metalization*

70µm / 5% metalization + cooling area

*: means perce ntual Cu metaliz ation on each la yer

Cross Section (JEDEC 1s0p) with Cooling Area

Cross Section (JEDEC 2s2p) with Cooling Area

PCB attached at Housing

Data Sheet 173 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Package Outlines

15 Package Outlines

Figure 56 PG-TSDSO-24-1 Dimensions

Green Product (RoHS compliant)

To meet the world-wide customer requirements for environmentally friendly products and to be compliant

with government regulations the device is available as a green product. Green products are RoHS-Compliant

(i.e Pb-free finish on leads and suitable for Pb-free soldering according to IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020).

For further information on alternative packages, please visit our website:

http://www.infineon.com/packages.Dimensions in mm

Data Sheet 174 Rev. 1.0

2018-08-01

TLE9471-3ES

Lite CAN SBC Family

Revision History

16 Revision History

Revision Date Changes

Rev. 1.00 2018-08-01 Initial Release

Trademarks

All referenced product or service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Edition 2018-08-01

Published by

Infineon Technologies AG

81726 Munich, Germany

Do you have a question about any

aspect of this document?

Email: erratum@infineon.com

Document reference

Z8F53477368

IMPORTANT NOTICE

The information given in this document shall in no

event be regarded as a guarantee of conditions or

characteristics ("Beschaffenheitsgarantie").

With respect to any examples, hints or any typical

values stated herein and/or any information regarding

the application of the product, Infineon Technologies

hereby disclaims any and all warranties and liabilities

of any kind, including without limitation warranties of

non-infringement of intellectual property rights of any

third party.

In addition, any information given in this document is

subject to customer's compliance with its obligations

stated in this document and any applicable legal

requirements, norms and standards concerning

customer's products and any use of the product of

Infineon Technologies in customer's applications.

The data contained in this document is exclusively

intended for technically trained staff. It is the

responsibility of customer's technical departments to

evaluate the suitability of the product for the intended

application and the completeness of the product

information given in this document with respect to

such application.

For further information on technology, delivery terms

and conditions and prices, please contact the nearest

Infineon Technologies Office (www.infineon.com).

WARNINGS

Due to technical requirements products may contain

dangerous substances. For information on the types

in question please contact your nearest Infineon

Technologies office.

Except as otherwise explicitly approved by Infineon

Technologies in a written document signed by

authorized representatives of Infineon Technologies,

Infineon Technologies’ products may not be used in

any applications where a failure of the product or any

consequences of the use thereof can reasonably be

expected to result in personal injury.